WO2022151438A1 - 通信方法及装置 - Google Patents

通信方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022151438A1
WO2022151438A1 PCT/CN2021/072323 CN2021072323W WO2022151438A1 WO 2022151438 A1 WO2022151438 A1 WO 2022151438A1 CN 2021072323 W CN2021072323 W CN 2021072323W WO 2022151438 A1 WO2022151438 A1 WO 2022151438A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
conflict
resources
resource
sideline
terminal device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/072323
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张天虹
黎超
黄海宁
杨帆
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2021/072323 priority Critical patent/WO2022151438A1/zh
Priority to PCT/CN2021/122145 priority patent/WO2022151767A1/zh
Priority to CN202180089307.1A priority patent/CN116746096A/zh
Publication of WO2022151438A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022151438A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • Sidelink communication refers to communication between terminal equipment and terminal equipment, for example, a first terminal equipment sends sidelink information to a second terminal equipment through a sidelink. Specifically, if the first terminal device perceives that the first resource is idle, it can reserve the first resource, and send the sideline service to the second terminal device on the first resource.
  • the first terminal device sends a request to the first terminal device.
  • the first sideline signal sent by the second terminal device interferes with the second sideline signal sent by the third terminal device on the second resource, which may cause the second terminal device to fail to successfully receive the first sideline signal, resulting in data loss. , which affects the reliability of sidechain communication.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus, which can solve the problem of resource conflict, avoid signal interference and data loss, and thus improve the reliability of side chain communication.
  • a communication method includes: receiving first sideline control information from a first terminal device, and sending a first message.
  • the first sideline control information is used to indicate the positions of A sideline resources, and A is a positive integer.
  • the first message is carried on the first resource.
  • the first resource is used to indicate a conflict state of B sideline resources, where B is a positive integer, and B is less than or equal to A.
  • a conflict state of the B sideline resources is indicated by the first resource, so that the corresponding device, such as the first terminal device, after receiving the first message, can
  • the borne first resource identifies whether resources in the B sidelink resources conflict, so as to avoid signal interference and data loss caused by the resource conflict in time, thereby improving the reliability of sidechain communication.
  • the conflict indication manner may include any of the following: whether each of the B sideline resources is in conflict, the i-th sideline resource among the B sideline resources does not conflict, and the B sideline resources are not in conflict. Whether there is a conflict between the i-th lateral resource and the B lateral resource in the row resources.
  • One conflict indication manner may indicate multiple conflict states, and one conflict state of the B sideline resources may belong to one of the multiple conflict states.
  • i is a positive integer less than or equal to A
  • whether B sideline resources are in conflict includes B sideline resources conflicting and B sideline resources not conflicting. The B sideline resources are in conflict, and any one of the B sideline resources is in conflict, and the B sideline resources are not in conflict, and none of the B sideline resources are in conflict.
  • conflict indication manners may indicate different numbers of conflict states
  • different conflict indication manners may also require different amounts of resources used for indication.
  • the terminal device or the network device can flexibly select a matching conflict indication manner according to the amount of resources. For example, if the resources used for conflict indication are sufficient, a conflict indication manner of whether each sideline resource is in conflict can be selected to indicate whether each sideline resource is in conflict or not, so that resource conflict can be avoided accurately.
  • the conflict indication mode in which the i-th lateral resource conflicts or the i-th lateral resource does not conflict can be selected, so as to achieve both accurate indication of resource conflict and resource cost savings. , thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • a conflict indication manner of whether the B sideline resources are in conflict can also be selected, so as to save resource overhead to the greatest extent and further improve communication efficiency.
  • receiving the first sideline control information includes: the second terminal device receiving the first sideline control information.
  • the second terminal device may be configured with a resource set.
  • a resource set may include multiple resources for indicating conflicting states.
  • a resource of multiple resources may be used to indicate a corresponding conflict state among multiple conflict states.
  • the first resource may belong to a resource collection.
  • the first resource may include one or more of the following: a first frequency domain resource, a first code domain resource, or a first bit domain resource.
  • the first code domain resource may be used to generate the first message.
  • the first bit field resource may be the number of bits occupied by the first message.
  • the first frequency domain resource may include: frequency domain location and/or the number of resource blocks.
  • the terminal or network device may select one or more resources suitable for the actual situation to flexibly indicate various conflict states. For example, if the number of conflicting states is relatively small, any single resource can be selected to indicate individual resources to improve processing efficiency and reduce resource occupation; save resources. For another example, if the number of conflicting states is relatively large, multiple resource combination indications may be selected to ensure the accuracy of the indications.
  • the first code domain resource may include one or more of the following: a cyclic shift code, a root sequence, or an orthogonal cover code, so that a code domain resource suitable for an actual situation can be selected to generate the first message in practice.
  • a cyclic shift code a root sequence
  • an orthogonal cover code so that a code domain resource suitable for an actual situation can be selected to generate the first message in practice.
  • an orthogonal cover code with a relatively small number of resources may be selected for indication, so as to save resources.
  • a cyclic shift code or root sequence with a relatively large number of resources may be selected for indication, so as to ensure the accuracy of the conflict indication.
  • the method described in the first aspect may further include: determining the first resource according to a conflict state of the B lateral resources.
  • determining the first resource according to a conflict state of the B lateral resources since there is a preset one-to-one correspondence between various conflict states and resource sets, after determining the conflict state, the terminal or network device can quickly determine the corresponding first resource according to the corresponding relationship of the conflict state, thereby improving the processing efficiency.
  • determining the first resource according to a conflict state of the B sideline resources may include: determining the first resource index according to the first service identifier indicated by the first sideline control information, and determining the first resource index according to the first resource index and A conflict state of the B sideline resources to determine the first resource.
  • R ID is the first resource index
  • X is the first service identifier
  • R RCI is the number of resources in the resource set.
  • the resource index is obtained by taking the modulo of the service identifier of the terminal device, different terminal devices can correspond to different resource indices.
  • different resources can be determined by using different resource indexes, so as to implement differentiated indications for different terminal devices, thereby avoiding false indications and improving indication accuracy.
  • the B sideline resources may include: a first sideline resource and/or a second sideline resource.
  • the second sideline resource is a period reserved resource of the first sideline resource.
  • the first sideline resources may include: resources bearing the first sideline control information and/or retransmission reserved resources indicated by the first sideline control information.
  • a communication method includes: sending first sideline control information, and receiving a first message, so as to determine a conflict state of B sideline resources according to the first resource.
  • the first sideline control information is used to indicate the positions of A sideline resources, and A is a positive integer.
  • the first message is carried on the first resource.
  • B is a positive integer, and B is less than or equal to A.
  • the method described in the second aspect may further include: according to a conflict state, replacing at least one of the conflicting lateral resources among the B lateral resources.
  • the conflict indication manner may include any of the following: whether each of the B sideline resources is in conflict, the i-th sideline resource among the B sideline resources does not conflict, and the B sideline resources are not in conflict. Whether there is a conflict between the i-th lateral resource and the B lateral resource in the row resources.
  • One conflict indication manner may indicate multiple conflict states, and one conflict state of the B sideline resources may belong to one of the multiple conflict states.
  • i is a positive integer less than or equal to A
  • whether B sideline resources are in conflict includes B sideline resources conflicting and B sideline resources not conflicting. The B sideline resources are in conflict, and any one of the B sideline resources is in conflict, and the B sideline resources are not in conflict, and none of the B sideline resources are in conflict.
  • the second terminal device may be used to receive the first sideline control information.
  • the second terminal device may be configured with a resource set.
  • a resource set may include multiple resources for indicating conflicting states.
  • a resource of multiple resources may be used to indicate a corresponding conflict state among multiple conflict states.
  • the first resource may belong to a resource collection.
  • the first resource may include one or more of the following: a first frequency domain resource, a first time domain resource, a first code domain resource, or a first bit domain resource.
  • the first code domain resource may be used to generate the first message.
  • the first bit field resource may be the number of bits occupied by the first message.
  • the first frequency domain resource may include: frequency domain location and/or the number of resource blocks.
  • the first code domain resource may include one or more of the following: a cyclic shift code, a root sequence, or an orthogonal cover code.
  • the B sideline resources may include: a first sideline resource and/or a second sideline resource.
  • the second sideline resource is a period reserved resource of the first sideline resource.
  • the first sideline resources may include: resources bearing the first sideline control information and/or retransmission reserved resources indicated by the first sideline control information.
  • a communication device in a third aspect, includes: a receiving module and a sending module.
  • the receiving module is configured to receive the first sideline control information from the first terminal device.
  • the sending module is used for sending the first message.
  • the first sideline control information is used to indicate the positions of A sideline resources, and A is a positive integer.
  • the first message is carried on the first resource.
  • the first resource is used to indicate a conflict state of B sideline resources, B is a positive integer, and B is less than or equal to A.
  • the conflict indication manner may include any of the following: whether each of the B sideline resources is in conflict, the i-th sideline resource among the B sideline resources does not conflict, and the B sideline resources are not in conflict. Whether there is a conflict between the i-th lateral resource and the B lateral resource in the row resources.
  • One conflict indication manner may indicate multiple conflict states, and one conflict state of the B sideline resources may belong to one of the multiple conflict states.
  • i is a positive integer less than or equal to A
  • whether B sideline resources are in conflict includes B sideline resources conflicting and B sideline resources not conflicting. The B sideline resources are in conflict, and any one of the B sideline resources is in conflict, and the B sideline resources are not in conflict, and none of the B sideline resources are in conflict.
  • the receiving module may be used for the second terminal device to receive the first sideline control information.
  • the second terminal device may be configured with a resource set.
  • a resource set may include multiple resources for indicating conflicting status.
  • a resource of multiple resources may be used to indicate a corresponding conflict state among multiple conflict states.
  • the first resource may belong to a resource collection.
  • the first resource may include one or more of the following: a first frequency domain resource, a first time domain resource, a first code domain resource, or a first bit domain resource.
  • the first code domain resource may be used to generate the first message.
  • the first bit field resource may be the number of bits occupied by the first message.
  • the first frequency domain resource may include: frequency domain location and/or the number of resource blocks.
  • the first code domain resource may include one or more of the following: a cyclic shift code, a root sequence, or an orthogonal cover code.
  • the apparatus of the third aspect may further include: a processing module.
  • the processing module is configured to determine the first resource according to a conflict state of the B sideline resources.
  • the processing module is configured to determine the first resource index according to the first service identifier indicated by the first sideline control information, and determine the first resource according to a conflict state between the first resource index and the B sideline resources .
  • R ID is the first resource index
  • X is the first service identifier
  • R RCI is the number of resources in the resource set.
  • the B sideline resources may include: a first sideline resource and/or a second sideline resource.
  • the second sideline resource is a period reserved resource of the first sideline resource.
  • the first sideline resources may include: resources bearing the first sideline control information and/or retransmission reserved resources indicated by the first sideline control information.
  • the receiving module and the sending module can be integrated into one module, such as a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module is used to implement the sending function and the receiving function of the apparatus described in the third aspect.
  • the apparatus of the third aspect may further include a storage module, where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module executes the program or the instruction, the apparatus can execute the method described in the first aspect.
  • the apparatus described in the third aspect may be terminal equipment or network equipment, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be set in the terminal equipment or network equipment, or may include terminal equipment or A device of a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a communication device in a fourth aspect, includes: a transceiver module and a processing module.
  • the transceiver module is configured to send the first sideline control information and receive the first message, wherein the first sideline control information is used to indicate the positions of A sideline resources, and A is a positive integer.
  • the first message is carried on the first resource.
  • the processing module is configured to determine a conflict state of the B sideline resources according to the first resource. where B is a positive integer, and B is less than or equal to A.
  • the processing module is further configured to replace at least one of the conflicting sideline resources in the B sideline resources according to a conflict state of the B sideline resources.
  • the conflict indication manner may include any of the following: whether each of the B sideline resources is in conflict, the i-th sideline resource among the B sideline resources does not conflict, and the B sideline resources are not in conflict. Whether there is a conflict between the i-th lateral resource and the B lateral resource in the row resources.
  • One conflict indication manner may indicate multiple conflict states, and one conflict state of the B sideline resources may belong to one of the multiple conflict states.
  • i is a positive integer less than or equal to A
  • whether B sideline resources are in conflict includes B sideline resources conflicting and B sideline resources not conflicting. The B sideline resources are in conflict, and any one of the B sideline resources is in conflict, and the B sideline resources are not in conflict, and none of the B sideline resources are in conflict.
  • the second terminal device is configured to receive the first sideline control information.
  • the second terminal device may be configured with a resource set.
  • a resource set may include multiple resources for indicating conflicting states.
  • a resource of multiple resources may be used to indicate a corresponding conflict state among multiple conflict states.
  • the first resource may belong to a resource collection.
  • the first resource may include one or more of the following: a first frequency domain resource, a first time domain resource, a first code domain resource, or a first bit domain resource.
  • the first code domain resource may be used to generate the first message.
  • the first bit field resource may be the number of bits occupied by the first message.
  • the first frequency domain resource may include: frequency domain location and/or the number of resource blocks.
  • the first code domain resource may include one or more of the following: a cyclic shift code, a root sequence, or an orthogonal cover code.
  • the B sideline resources may include: a first sideline resource and/or a second sideline resource.
  • the second sideline resource is a period reserved resource of the first sideline resource.
  • the first sideline resources may include: resources bearing the first sideline control information and/or retransmission reserved resources indicated by the first sideline control information.
  • the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module.
  • the receiving module is configured to implement the receiving function of the apparatus described in the fourth aspect.
  • the sending module is configured to implement the sending function of the apparatus described in the fourth aspect.
  • the apparatus according to the fourth aspect may further include a storage module, where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module executes the program or the instruction
  • the communication device can execute the method described in the second aspect.
  • the communication device described in the fourth aspect may be terminal equipment or network equipment, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be set in the terminal equipment or network equipment, or may include terminal equipment or a device of a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a communication device in a fifth aspect, includes a processor coupled to the memory.
  • the processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in the memory to cause the apparatus to perform the method as described in the first aspect, or the method as described in the second aspect.
  • the apparatus of the fifth aspect may further include: a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the receiver is used to implement the receiving function of the device, and the transmitter is used to implement the transmitting function of the device.
  • the transmitter and receiver can also be integrated into one device, such as a transceiver. Wherein, the transceiver is used to realize the sending function and the receiving function of the device.
  • the apparatus described in the fifth aspect may be terminal equipment or network equipment, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be set in the terminal equipment or network equipment, or may include terminal equipment or network equipment.
  • a device of a device which is not limited in this application.
  • a communication device in a sixth aspect, includes: a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program which, when executed by the processor, causes the apparatus to perform the method as described in the first aspect, or the method as described in the second aspect.
  • the apparatus of the sixth aspect may further include: a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the receiver is used for realizing the receiving function of the device, and the transmitter is used for the sending function of the device.
  • the transmitter and receiver can also be integrated into one device, such as a transceiver. Wherein, the transceiver is used to realize the sending function and the receiving function of the device.
  • the apparatus described in the sixth aspect may be terminal equipment or network equipment, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in terminal equipment or network equipment, or may include terminal equipment or network equipment device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a communication device in a seventh aspect, includes: a processor and an interface circuit.
  • the interface circuit is used for receiving the code instruction and transmitting it to the processor; the processor is used for running the code instruction to execute the method as described in the first aspect, or execute the method as described in the second aspect.
  • the apparatus of the seventh aspect may further include: a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the receiver is used to implement the receiving function of the device
  • the transmitter is used to implement the transmitting function of the device.
  • the transmitter and receiver can also be integrated into one device, such as a transceiver. Wherein, the transceiver is used to realize the sending function and the receiving function of the device.
  • the apparatus of the seventh aspect may further include a memory, where the memory stores programs or instructions.
  • the processor described in the seventh aspect executes the program or the instruction, the apparatus can perform the method described in the first aspect or the method described in the second aspect.
  • the apparatus described in the seventh aspect may be terminal equipment or network equipment, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in terminal equipment or network equipment, or may include terminal equipment or network equipment.
  • a device of a device which is not limited in this application.
  • a communication device in an eighth aspect, includes a processor and a transceiver, wherein the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit or an interface circuit, the transceiver is used for information exchange between the device and other devices, and the processor executes program instructions to execute the first aspect the method, or perform the method according to the second aspect.
  • the apparatus according to the eighth aspect may further include a memory, where the memory stores programs or instructions.
  • the processor described in the eighth aspect executes the program or the instruction, the apparatus can perform the method described in the first aspect or the method described in the second aspect.
  • the apparatus described in the eighth aspect may be terminal equipment or network equipment, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in terminal equipment or network equipment, or may include terminal equipment or network equipment.
  • a device of a device which is not limited in this application.
  • a computer-readable storage medium may comprise a computer program or instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method as described in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a computer program product may comprise a computer program or instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform a method as described in the first or second aspect.
  • a communication system may comprise the apparatus of the third aspect and/or the apparatus of the fourth aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is an example diagram 1 of the location of time-frequency resources in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram 1 of a scene of a hidden node in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a second schematic diagram of a scene of a hidden node in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a second example of the location of time-frequency resources in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram 1 of a scenario in which a modulo operation is performed in a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8 is a second schematic diagram of a scenario in which a modulo operation is performed in a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram 3 of a scenario where a modulo operation is performed in a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a fourth schematic diagram of a scenario in which a modulo operation is performed in a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram five of a scenario in which a modulo operation is performed in a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 12 is a sixth schematic diagram of a scenario in which a modulo operation is performed in a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram 1 of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a second schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a third schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the resources can be used to carry corresponding messages, such as sidelink control information (SCI), which can include: code domain resources, bit domain resources, time domain resources, and frequency domain resources.
  • SCI sidelink control information
  • the code domain resource can be used to generate a message, it can also be said that the code domain resource carries the message or the code domain resource is associated with the message, and the code domain resource can include one or more of the following: cyclic shift code (cyclic shift code) , root sequence, base sequence, or orthogonal cover code.
  • cyclic shift code cyclic shift code
  • root sequence root sequence
  • base sequence base sequence
  • orthogonal cover code orthogonal cover code
  • n can be (0,1,...,Nc-1), Nc is the length of the code sequence, x(n) is the message, and fcs () is the encoding function corresponding to the code domain resource.
  • the bit domain resource may be the number of bits occupied by the message, and may have different values.
  • bit-domain resource If the bit-domain resource is used to carry the message, the relationship between the bit-domain resource and the message can satisfy the following equation (2):
  • x(n) is the message
  • y(m) is the bit domain resource.
  • the bit field resource is the content of the message. Different values of the bit code can represent different message contents.
  • x(n) is the message
  • y(m) is the bit domain resource
  • f cs ( ) is the encoding function corresponding to the code domain resource.
  • Different values of bit codes and combinations of encoding functions can represent different message contents.
  • code domain resources and the bit domain resources can carry various message contents independently or in combination.
  • the time domain resources may be one or more of the following: symbols, time slots (slots), mini-slots (mini-slots), subframes (subframes), radio frames, etc. (radio frames).
  • the frequency domain resources can be one or more of the following: LsubCh consecutive sub-channels (sub-channels), resource pools (resource pools), carriers (carriers), subcarriers (subcarriers), resource blocks (resource blocks, RBs) , resource element (RE), bandwidth part (BWP), etc. Among them, L is a positive integer.
  • the frequency domain resources may include: frequency domain locations and/or the number of resource blocks.
  • the resource blocks may be physical resource blocks (physical resource blocks, PRBs).
  • a time-frequency resource can carry a physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH), a physical sidelink share channel (PSSCH), or a physical sidelink feedback Channel (physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH), and can also carry demodulation reference signal (demodulatin reference signal, DMRS), etc., which are not limited.
  • PSCCH physical sidelink control channel
  • PSSCH physical sidelink share channel
  • PSFCH physical sidelink feedback Channel
  • DMRS demodulatin reference signal
  • the retransmission reserved resources may be time-frequency resources reserved by the terminal device in one SCI for performing data retransmission.
  • the retransmission reserved resources may be reserved in a chain, and may be one or more, but it is not limited.
  • the SCI can indicate resource reservation through the three fields of frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency resource assignment), time domain resource assignment (Time resource assignment) and resource reservation period (resource reservation period), and the reserved resources are used for reuse transmission and/or periodic transmission.
  • the frequency domain resource configuration includes time domain information of the configured reserved resources, and the time domain resource configuration includes frequency domain and subchannel information of the configured reserved resources.
  • the frequency domain resource configuration and the time domain resource configuration include the sl-MaxNumPerReserve parameter, which is used to indicate the maximum number of reserved resources, the number of reserved resources is greater than or equal to 1, and one resource is the resource reserved for retransmission.
  • the first reserved resource is the resource where the SCI is currently sent, and the remaining sl-MaxNumPerReserve-1 reserved resources are the resources reserved for retransmission.
  • SCI can also be reserved in a chain, that is, sl-MaxNumPerReserve resources are indicated in an SCI, the first one is the resource where the SCI is currently sent, and the remaining sl-MaxNumPerReserve-1 reserved resources are reserved for retransmission. resource.
  • the terminal device may also reserve sl-MaxNumPerReserve resources periodically.
  • FIG. 1 shows 3 time-frequency resources, including sideline resource R1, sideline resource R2, and sideline resource R3.
  • the sideline resource R1 may be ⁇ a,(b,b+5) ⁇
  • the sideline resource R2 may be ⁇ a+2,(b+2,b+7) ⁇
  • the sideline resource R3 may be ⁇ a+ 4,(b+3,b+8) ⁇ .
  • a is the slot number of the time-frequency resource
  • b is the sub-channel number of the time-frequency resource
  • a and b are both integers
  • a and b may represent the time-frequency position of the sideline resource.
  • ⁇ a,(b,b+5) ⁇ can indicate that the time domain position of the sideline resource R1 is located in the time slot a, and the sideline resource R1 is located in time slot a.
  • the frequency domain positions are in subchannels b to b+5.
  • the terminal device may reserve the sideline resource R2 and/or the sideline resource R3 for the first sideline information, so that the terminal device can use the sideline resource
  • the first sideline information is retransmitted on R2 and/or the sideline resource R3.
  • the periodic reserved resources may be time-frequency resources reserved by the terminal device for periodic services. Among them, periodic resources can be reserved in a chain.
  • Figure 1 also shows side row resources R4-R6.
  • the sideline resource R4 may be ⁇ a+6,(b,b+5) ⁇
  • the sideline resource R5 may be ⁇ a+8,(b+2,b+7) ⁇
  • the sideline resource R6 may be is ⁇ a+10,(b+3,b+8) ⁇ .
  • the terminal device sends the sideline information of the first service on the sideline resource R1, and the period of the first service is 6 time slots
  • the terminal device can reserve the sideline resource R4 for the sideline resource R1 and the sideline resource for the sideline resource.
  • R2 reserves sideline resource R5, and reserves sideline resource R6 for sideline resource R3. In this way, the terminal device can periodically send the sidelink information of the first service on the sidelink resource R4, and periodically send the retransmission information of the first service on the sidelink resources R5-R6.
  • the half-duplex mode means that the sending action and the receiving action of the terminal device cannot be performed at the same time, that is, in the same time slot, the terminal device either performs the sending action or the receiving action.
  • Hidden nodes are devices that are not perceived by end devices.
  • FIG. 2 shows two user equipments (user equipment, terminal equipment), including terminal equipment A, terminal equipment B, and terminal equipment C.
  • the sensing range of the terminal device A is the area shown by the dotted line Cell 1 in FIG. 2
  • the sensing range of the terminal device B is the area shown by the dotted line Cell 2 in FIG. 2 . Since the terminal device A and the terminal device B are located outside each other's perception range, the terminal device A and the terminal device B are each other's hidden nodes. More specifically, if terminal equipment A and terminal equipment C (terminal equipment C is located within the sensing range of terminal equipment A and terminal equipment B) establishes a side link L 1 , then terminal equipment B can be the side link L. 1 ; otherwise, if terminal device B and terminal device C establish a sidelink L2, then terminal device A may be the hidden node of the sidelink L2.
  • FIG. 3 shows two terminal devices, including terminal device A and terminal device B.
  • the sensing range of the terminal device A is the area shown by the dotted line Cell 1 in FIG. 3
  • the sensing range of the terminal device B is the area shown by the dotted line Cell 2 in FIG. 3 . Since terminal equipment B is located within the sensing range of terminal equipment A and terminal equipment A is located outside the sensing range of terminal equipment B, terminal equipment A can sense terminal equipment B, but terminal equipment B cannot sense terminal equipment A, so it is considered that terminal equipment A is a hidden node of terminal device B, but terminal device B is not a hidden node of terminal device A.
  • terminal device B can be the hidden node of the side link L1; on the contrary, if terminal device B and terminal device C establish a side link L1, link L2, the terminal device A is not the hidden node of the side link L2.
  • the conflict may be partial overlap (overlapping), collision (collision), and confit, which is not limited in this application.
  • the resource conflict refers to the time-frequency resource conflict, that is, the positions of the frequency resources overlap or partially overlap, and the types may include: sending conflict and sending and receiving conflict. They are introduced separately below.
  • the transmission collision refers to the collision of time-frequency resources for transmitting side chain information. Specifically, if multiple terminal devices transmit sidechain information to other terminal devices on time-frequency resources whose time-frequency positions overlap or partially overlap, the time-frequency resources have a transmission conflict and cause signal interference. In this way, the success rate of data reception of the terminal device will decrease due to signal interference, thereby affecting the reliability of communication.
  • FIG. 4 shows four time-frequency resources, including sideline resource R7, sideline resource R8, sideline resource R9, and sideline resource R10.
  • the sideline resource R7 may be ⁇ a,(b+1,b+6) ⁇
  • the sideline resource R6 may be ⁇ a,(b+4,b+9) ⁇
  • the sideline resource R9 may be ⁇ a ,(b+10,b+15) ⁇
  • the side row resource R10 may be ⁇ a+2,(b+1,b+6) ⁇ .
  • terminal device A sends the first sideline information to terminal device C on sideline resource R7
  • terminal device B sends the second sideline information to terminal device C on sideline resource R8
  • terminal device C may Due to the interference of the signals of the first sideline information and the second sideline information, the first sideline information and the second sideline information cannot be received successfully, resulting in data loss.
  • terminal equipment C and the terminal equipment D may also be unable to successfully receive the first sideline information and the second sideline information due to the interference of the signals of the first sideline information and the second sideline information, resulting in data loss.
  • the frequency domain positions of the sideline resource R7 and the sideline resource R8, and the sideline resource R8 and the sideline resource R9 do not coincide. , so there is no transmission conflict between the sideline resource R7 and the sideline resource R9, and the sideline resource R8 and the sideline resource R9.
  • terminal device A sends the first sideline information to terminal device C on sideline resource R7 or sideline resource R8, and terminal device B sends second sideline information to terminal device C on sideline resource R9, then The terminal device C can still receive the first sideline information and the second sideline information at the same time.
  • the frequency domain positions of the sideline resource R7 and the sideline resource R10 are coincident, since the time-domain positions of the sideline resource R7 and the sideline resource R10 do not overlap, the sideline resource R7 and the sideline resource R10 are not transmitted. conflict. For example, if terminal device A sends the first sideline information to terminal device C on sideline resource R7, and terminal device B sends the second sideline information to terminal device C on sideline resource R10, then terminal device C can sequentially First sideline information and second sideline information are received.
  • Transceiver conflict refers to the conflict between time-frequency resources used for sending side chain information and time-frequency resources used for receiving side chain information. Specifically, due to the half-duplex mode, if the terminal device sends sidelink information on the first time-frequency resource, it cannot receive information on the second time-frequency resource that overlaps or partially overlaps with the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource. Sidechain information from other terminal devices, resulting in data loss and affecting communication reliability.
  • terminal device C sends the first sideline information to terminal device A on sideline resource R7, then terminal device C can also receive second sideline information from terminal device B on sideline resource R10.
  • the time-frequency resource only when the time-domain positions are coincident or partially coincident, the time-frequency resource has a conflict of sending and receiving, otherwise, there is no conflict of sending and receiving.
  • terminal equipment C determines that the reserved resources indicated by SCI1 conflict with the reserved resources indicated by SCI2, it sends a message to terminal equipment A or terminal equipment B before the collision position.
  • a first message is sent to indicate that the reserved resources indicated by SCI1 collide with the reserved resources indicated by SCI2.
  • the side row resource R1 in FIG. 1 is the resource indicated by the SCI, and is a resource bearing the SCI, and the side row resources R2 and R3 are reserved resources indicated by the SCI. If the terminal device C determines that the lateral resource R2 in FIG. 1 is in conflict, it may send a first message before the time domain position of the lateral resource R2 to indicate the conflict of the lateral resource R2.
  • terminal device C Terminal device B sends a first message to indicate a conflict of multiple reserved resources.
  • the side row resource R1 in FIG. 1 is the resource indicated by the SCI, and is a resource bearing the SCI, and the side row resources R2 and R3 are reserved resources indicated by the SCI. If the terminal device C determines that the lateral resources R2 and R3 in FIG. 1 are in conflict, it may send a first message before the time domain position of the lateral resources R2 to indicate the conflict of the lateral resources R2 and R3.
  • terminal device C may send a message to terminal device A or terminal device B before each conflict position.
  • the first message corresponding to each reserved resource is used to indicate the conflict of each reserved resource in sequence.
  • the side row resource R1 in FIG. 1 is the resource indicated by the SCI, and is the resource bearing the SCI, and the side row resources R2 and R3 are reserved resources indicated by the SCI. If the terminal device C determines that the sideline resources R2 and R3 in FIG.
  • the first message can be sent once.
  • the first message is sent again before the domain location to indicate a sideline resource R3 conflict.
  • terminal equipment C when terminal equipment C determines that the resource carrying SCI1 conflicts with the resource carrying SCI2, it sends a first message to terminal equipment A or terminal equipment B after the conflict position to indicate the resource indicated by SCI1. There is a conflict with the resource indicated by SCI2.
  • the side row resource R1 in FIG. 1 is the resource bearing the SCI
  • the side row resource R2 is the reserved resource indicated by the SCI. If the terminal device C determines that the lateral resources R1 and R2 in FIG. 1 are in conflict, it may send a first message after the time domain position of the lateral resources R1 to indicate the conflict of the lateral resources R1 and R2.
  • the terminal device C may send a message to the terminal device A or the terminal device B after the first or last conflict position.
  • the side row resource R1 in FIG. 1 is the resource indicated by the SCI, and is a resource bearing the SCI, and the side row resources R2 and R3 are reserved resources indicated by the SCI. If the terminal device C determines that the lateral resources R1-R3 in FIG. 1 are in conflict, it may send a first message after the time domain position of the lateral resources R1, R2 or R3 to indicate the conflict of the lateral resources R1-R3.
  • the terminal device C may send a message to the terminal device A or the terminal device B after the first or last conflict position.
  • the side row resource R1 in FIG. 1 is the resource indicated by the SCI, and is a resource bearing the SCI, and the side row resources R2 and R3 are reserved resources indicated by the SCI. If the terminal device C determines that the sideline resources R1-R2 in FIG. 1 are in conflict, it can send the first message twice after the time domain position of the sideline resource R1 or R2, one time indicating the sideline resource R1 conflict, and the other indicating the sideline resource R1 conflict. Resource R2 conflict.
  • WiFi wireless fidelity
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • D2D device-todevie
  • Communication systems Internet of Vehicles communication systems
  • 4th generation (4G) mobile communication systems such as long term evolution (LTE) systems
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • 5th generation (5G) mobile communication systems such as new radio (NR) systems
  • 6G 6th generation
  • the network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the evolution of the architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system to which the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • the communication system includes a plurality of terminal devices, such as a first terminal device, a second terminal device, a third terminal device and a fourth terminal device.
  • the above-mentioned terminal equipment is a terminal that is connected to the above-mentioned communication system and has a wireless transceiver function, or a chip or a chip system that can be provided in the terminal.
  • the terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment, access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user equipment.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation security ( Wireless terminals in transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, vehicle-mounted terminals, RSUs with terminal functions, etc.
  • the terminal device of the present application may also be an on-board module, on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip or on-board unit built into the vehicle as one or more components or units.
  • the vehicle-mounted component, the vehicle-mounted chip or the vehicle-mounted unit can implement the communication method provided in this application.
  • the above-mentioned terminal equipment may include: a first terminal equipment, a second terminal equipment, a third terminal equipment and a fourth terminal equipment.
  • the first terminal device and the third terminal device may be sending terminal devices, the second terminal device may be an auxiliary terminal device, and the fourth terminal device may be a receiving terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may be used to monitor PSCCH1 and PSSCH1 of the first terminal device, and monitor PSCCH2 and PSSCH2 of the third terminal device.
  • SCI1 is carried on PSCCH1
  • SCI2 is carried on PSCCH2.
  • the second terminal device may be a third-party terminal device, or one of the sending terminal devices (such as the second terminal device or the third terminal device), or one of the receiving terminal devices (such as the fourth terminal device) Terminal Equipment).
  • the second terminal device may be one or multiple.
  • the second terminal device receives and decodes the SCI from the second terminal device and the third terminal device. If the reserved resources conflict (full or partial conflict), the second terminal device sends a first message to inform the second terminal device and the third terminal device.
  • One of the terminal equipments Specifically, it is divided into the following two cases: when the second terminal device determines that the reserved resource indicated by SCI1 and the reserved resource indicated by SCI2 conflict, the second terminal device sends the first message to the first terminal device or the third terminal device; The second terminal device sends a first message to the first terminal device or the third terminal device when it is determined that the resource bearing the SCI1 and the resource bearing the SCI2 conflict.
  • the first terminal device/third terminal device is used to monitor the first message of the second terminal device.
  • the number of the first terminal device/third terminal device is not limited to only 2.
  • the terminal devices may all reserve the same resource, or the resources where the SCIs of multiple first terminal devices/third terminal devices are located conflict.
  • the first message can be sent to instruct the first terminal device to replace the transmission resource, and the second terminal device can also replace the transmission resource.
  • the fourth terminal device may be one or more, and is configured to receive PSCCH1 and PSSCH1 from the first terminal device and PSCCH2 and PSSCH2 from the third terminal device.
  • the scenario of the present application is also not limited to unicast, that is, the link between the first terminal device/third terminal device and the fourth terminal device may be unicast, multicast, or broadcast. If the second terminal device and the fourth terminal device are the same device, the transmitting terminal device of the second terminal device may be instructed, such as the first terminal device to replace the transmission resource, or the terminal device that interferes with the transmission of the second terminal device may be instructed, For example, the third terminal device replaces transmission resources.
  • the communication system may also include network equipment.
  • the above-mentioned network device is a device located on the network side of the above-mentioned communication system and has a function of wireless transmission and reception, or a chip or a chip system that can be provided in the device.
  • the network devices include but are not limited to: access points (APs) in wireless fidelity (WiFi) systems, such as home gateways, routers, servers, switches, bridges, etc., evolved Node B (evolved Node B (eNB), Radio Network Controller (RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), Base Station Controller (BSC), Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Home Base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission and reception point, TRP or transmission point, TP) etc., it can also be 5G, such as a gNB in a new radio (NR) system, or a transmission point (TRP or TP), one
  • the communication methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be applicable to the above-mentioned multiple terminal devices, or the communication between multiple terminal devices and network devices.
  • the second terminal device or the network device can be used as an auxiliary device for executing the communication method to perceive the first terminal device. Whether the lateral resources used by a terminal device conflict with the lateral resources used by a third terminal device.
  • the third terminal device can be used as an auxiliary device for executing the communication method, In order to sense whether the sidelink resources used by the third terminal equipment conflict with the sidelink resources used by the first terminal equipment.
  • the second terminal device and the third terminal device may be the same device.
  • FIG. 5 is a simplified schematic diagram exemplified for ease of understanding, and the communication system may further include other network devices and/or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 5 .
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication method may be applicable to the above-mentioned first scenario or the second scenario.
  • the above-mentioned first scenario is used as an example for introduction, but it is not limited.
  • the communication method includes the following steps:
  • the first terminal device sends the first sideline control information to the second terminal device, and the second terminal device receives the first sideline control information from the first terminal device.
  • the first sideline control information may be used to indicate the positions of A sideline resources, where A is a positive integer, and may be one or more of the following: SCI message, media access control address control information element (media access control address control element, MAC CE) message, radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) message, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the first sideline control information may include: first time domain resource allocation information, first frequency domain resource allocation information, and first time-frequency resource reservation period information.
  • the A sidelink resources may be time-frequency resources used by the first terminal device for sidelink transmission, including: a first sidelink resource and a second sidelink resource.
  • the first time domain resource allocation information may be used to indicate: a time domain location of the first sidelink resource, such as a time slot where the first sidelink resource is located.
  • the first sideline resources may include: resources bearing the first sideline control information and/or retransmission reserved resources indicated by the first sideline control information.
  • the resources bearing the first sideline control information include resources occupied by the first sideline control information and data scheduled by the first sideline control information, that is, resources occupied by the first PSCCH/PSSCH.
  • the resources bearing the first sideline control information may also be referred to as: resources bearing the data scheduled by the first sideline control information, resources bearing the first PSCCH, resources bearing the first PSSCH, and resources bearing the first PSCCH/PSSCH Resources.
  • the number of re-reservation resources may be one or two, and the re-reservation resources may be located in a first time period among a plurality of consecutive time periods in the time domain.
  • the first time segment may be the time segment where the resource carrying the first sideline control information is located, such as a transport block (TB), or it may also be
  • TB transport block
  • the time period after this time period is not limited.
  • the resource bearing the first sideline control information may be the sideline resource R1
  • the retransmission reserved resources indicated by the first sideline control information may be the sideline resources R2 and R3, in other words, the first sideline resource
  • the control information may include side row resources R1-R3.
  • the first frequency domain resource allocation information may be used to indicate: the frequency domain position of the first sideline resource, such as information about the starting position and length of the subchannel occupied by the first sideline resource.
  • the first time-frequency resource reservation period information may be used to indicate the period of the first sideline control information, and the period may be [1:99], 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 ms, etc.
  • the first sidelink control information may indicate the position of the first sidelink resource through the first time-frequency resource allocation information and the first time-frequency resource allocation information, and the position of the first sidelink resource and the first time-frequency resource can be used to indicate the location of the first sidelink resource. Reservation period information, indicating the location of the second sideline resource.
  • the second sideline resource is a periodically reserved resource of the first sideline resource, for example, it may be a periodically reserved resource of the resource carrying the first sideline control information and/or the retransmission indicated by the first sideline control information Period of Reserving Resources
  • the reserved resources are located in the a-th period after the first period, and a is a positive integer.
  • the first sideline control information can be ⁇ a,(b,b+5) ⁇ through the sideline resource R1 and the period is 6 time slots , indicating that the side row resource R4 is ⁇ a+6,(b,b+5) ⁇ .
  • the second terminal device can determine the positions of the A sidelink resources according to the indication of the first sidelink control information.
  • the first sideline control information may further include: a first service identifier and priority information of the first service.
  • the first service identifier may be used to indicate the first service, different service identifiers may be indicated by different sideline control information, and different service identifiers may indicate different services.
  • the first service identifier may be one or more of the following: a source identifier (source ID), a destination identifier (destination ID), a group member identifier (member ID), a priority, and the like. Specifically, it may be the source ID, destination ID, member ID, priority, etc. indicated in the first control information.
  • the priority information of the first service may be used to indicate the priority of the first service, and different services may have different priorities.
  • the second terminal device sends the first message, and the first terminal device receives the first message.
  • the first message may be carried on the first resource, and may be a resource collision indication (resource collision indication, RCI) message, which may also be referred to as a resource collision indication, resource coincidence indication, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • RCI resource collision indication
  • the resource conflict indication can be sent after the conflicted resources, and is denoted as post-RCI in this patent for the convenience of description.
  • the resource conflict indication may be sent before potentially conflicting resources, and is denoted as pre-RCI in this patent for the convenience of description, and may also be referred to as pre-collision indication, pre-collision indication, or pre-coincidence indication, which is not limited in this application.
  • the B sideline resources may be at least a part of the A sideline resources, including: the first sideline resource and/or the second sideline resource.
  • the second terminal device may selectively determine the resource conflict among the A sideline resources according to the actual demand. For example, the second terminal device may determine a conflict state of the retransmission reserved resources indicated by the first sideline control information, such as determining a conflict state of the sideline resource R2 and/or the sideline resource R3 in FIG. Avoid resource conflicts during this cycle. For another example, the second terminal device may determine a conflict state of the resource bearing the first sideline control information or the second sideline resource, such as determining a conflict state of the sideline resource R1 or the sideline resource R4 in FIG. 1 , To avoid resource conflicts between cycles.
  • the second terminal device may also determine a conflict state between the first sideline resource and the second sideline resource, such as determining a conflict state of the sideline resources R1-R3 in FIG. 1, the sideline resources R2- A conflict state of R4, or a conflict state of sideline resources R1-R4, so as to avoid resource conflict in the current cycle and between cycles at the same time.
  • a conflict state of the B sideline resources may be indicated by different conflict indication manners.
  • the conflict indication mode may be any of the following: whether each of the B lateral resources collides (mode 1), the i-th lateral resource in the B lateral resources does not conflict (mode 2), B Among the ith sideline resources, the ith sideline resource conflicts (mode 3), and whether the B sideline resources conflict (mode 4).
  • i can be a positive integer less than or equal to B, and whether the B sideline resources conflict is: any of the B sideline resources conflicts, or none of the B sideline resources conflict.
  • any one of the above conflict indication manners can indicate multiple conflict states of the B lateral resources, and the above one conflict state of the B lateral resources belongs to one of the multiple conflict states.
  • manners 1 to 4 use a single sideline resource as a granularity for indication, while manner 4 uses a whole B sidelink resources as a granularity for indication.
  • the specific description is given below.
  • Mode 1 since each sideline resource has two states of conflict and non-conflict, there can be 2B conflicting states of B sideline resources in total, so mode 1 can indicate 2B conflicts state.
  • Mode 1 can be regarded as an acknowledgement (ACK)-negative acknowledgement (NACK).
  • ACK acknowledgement
  • NACK negative acknowledgement
  • the state in which there is a resource conflict may be considered as ACK
  • the state in which the B sideline resources are not in conflict may be considered as NACK.
  • indicating that the i-th sideline resource does not conflict may refer to: as long as there is no conflict in the B sideline resources, it will be indicated, and specifically indicating which resource does not conflict.
  • the only conflict state that is not indicated by way 2 is that all B sideline resources conflict, so way 2 can indicate 2 B -1 conflict states.
  • mode 2 can be regarded as a positive acknowledgment (NACK only).
  • indicating the i-th sideline resource conflict may refer to: as long as there is a conflict in the B sideline resources, it will be indicated, and which resource conflicts will be specifically indicated.
  • the only conflict state not indicated by way 3 is that B sideline resources do not conflict, so way 3 can also indicate 2 B -1 conflict states.
  • way 3 can be regarded as only negative acknowledgement (ACK only).
  • whether the B sideline resources are in conflict may include two types: the B sideline resources are in conflict and the B sideline resources are not in conflict.
  • the B sideline resources conflicting may be: any one of the B sideline resources is in conflict
  • the B sideline resources are not in conflict may be: none of the B sideline resources conflict, in other words, method 4 A total of two conflict states, which are B sideline resources conflicting and B sideline resources non-conflicting, can be indicated.
  • Mode 4 indicates these two conflicting states, it can be considered as ACK-NACK. If Mode 4 only indicates that the B sideline resources are in conflict, it can be considered as ACK only. If Mode 4 only indicates that the B sideline resources do not conflict, it can be considered as NACK only.
  • Example 1 The A sideline resources are the sideline resources R1-R6 shown in FIG. 1 , and the B sideline resources are the sideline resources R1-R4 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • Example 2 The A sideline resources are the sideline resources R1-R6 shown in FIG. 1 , and the B sideline resources are the sideline resources R1-R3 or R2-R4 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the second terminal device can indicate a conflict state of at least one resource in the above-mentioned sideline resources R2-R4. If the post-collision indication is adopted, the second terminal device may indicate a conflict state of at least one resource in the above-mentioned sideline resources R1-R3. If the pre-collision and post-collision indication is adopted, the second terminal device may indicate a conflict state of at least one resource in the above-mentioned sideline resources R1-R4.
  • the third terminal device can flexibly select a matching indication manner according to the amount of resources used for conflict indication. For example, if the amount of resources used for conflict indication is sufficient, the second terminal device may select mode 1 to accurately indicate whether each sideline resource conflicts or not, so as to accurately avoid resource conflict. For another example, if the amount of resources used for conflict indication is limited, the second terminal device may select Mode 2 or Mode 3, so as to accurately indicate resource conflict and save resource overhead, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the second terminal device may also select Mode 4 to save resource overhead to the greatest extent, thereby further improving communication efficiency.
  • the first resource may include one or more of the following: a first frequency domain resource, a first time domain resource, a first code domain resource, or a first bit domain resource.
  • the first time domain resource may include one or more of the following: symbols, time slots, mini-slots, subframes or radio frames, and the like.
  • the first frequency domain resources may include one or more of the following: REs, RBs, subchannels, resource pools, BWPs, carriers, or subcarriers, for example, REs may also be PRBs, and the first frequency domain resources are PRBs that may be PRBs Frequency domain location and/or quantity.
  • the first code field resource may be used to generate the first message.
  • the first bit field resource may be the number of bits occupied by the first message.
  • the first code domain resource may include one or more of the following: a cyclic shift code, a root sequence, a base sequence, or an orthogonal cover code, which is not limited.
  • the first resource may be any resource or a combination of multiple resources
  • the above-mentioned multiple conflicting states of the B sideline resources can be flexibly indicated. For example, if the number of the above-mentioned multiple conflict states is relatively small, any one resource can be selected to be indicated individually to improve processing efficiency; or, multiple resource combination instructions can be selected to reduce the demand for each resource, thereby saving energy resource. For another example, if the number of the above-mentioned multiple conflict states is relatively large, multiple resource combination indications may be selected to ensure the accuracy of the indications.
  • the second terminal device may be configured with a resource set, for example, a network device configures the resource set.
  • the first resource may belong to a resource collection.
  • the resource set may include one or more of the following sets: a time domain resource set, a frequency domain resource set, a code domain resource set, or a bit domain resource set.
  • Each resource in the resource set may correspondingly include one or more of the following: time-domain resources, frequency-domain resources, code-domain resources, or bit-domain resources, and each resource may be used to indicate a corresponding one of the above-mentioned multiple conflict states. a state of conflict.
  • the resource set includes a frequency domain resource set and a code domain resource set
  • the frequency domain resource set includes There are frequency domain resources in the code domain resource set code domain resources
  • the resource set includes a resource.
  • One frequency domain resource and one code domain resource may be used jointly to indicate a corresponding conflict state among the above-mentioned multiple conflict states.
  • the resource set includes a frequency domain resource set and a code domain resource set, and a PRB resource and a cyclic shift code resource may be used jointly to indicate a corresponding conflict state among the above-mentioned multiple conflict states.
  • the network side may also configure a conflict indication mode.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the situation configured by the RRC for indicating in the first message may be one of the following situations:
  • the first message indicates the collision of the previous resource, that is, the post-collision indication
  • the first message indicates the collision of the next resource, that is, a pre-collision indication
  • Scenario 5 The first message indicates a collision of resources between cycles
  • the RRC configuration may be the configuration of the per resource pool, for example, configured in the SL-resourcepool IE.
  • the second terminal device may use a field in the first message to indicate that the first message may indicate one of the foregoing multiple situations.
  • this field may occupy multiple bits, may occupy different resources, and may use different cyclic shift codes, root sequences, and the like.
  • the first terminal device may instruct the second terminal device to use one of the foregoing multiple situations, and the instruction may be included in the assistance request signaling sent by the first terminal device.
  • frequency domain resources code domain resources, and bit domain resources are used as examples for introduction below.
  • time domain resources reference may be made to related content of frequency domain resources, which will not be repeated here.
  • the frequency domain resource set may be determined according to the configuration of the network device.
  • a network device such as a base station, can configure PSFCH-related resources, including: PRBs, N subch subchannels, time slots and
  • N subch can be the number of sub-channels in the resource pool, which can be a positive integer, such as 20 or 40, and It can be an integer multiple of N subch , and the resource used to indicate the conflict can be distributed periodically.
  • the period may be the interval between the starting time domain position of the PSSCH and the starting time domain position of the PSFCH number of time slots, Can be a positive integer, such as 0, 1, 2 or 4, etc.
  • the second terminal device can N subch and relationship, such as Sure PRBs, the The number of PRBs may be a group of PRBs used to carry the first message.
  • the PSSCH collision indication information can be mapped to Group PRB. Among them, if It means that the above group of PRBs can be mapped to an initial sub-channel corresponding to the PSSCH, that is, the first message can be carried by a group of PRBs on the initial sub-channel. like It means that the above set of PRBs can be mapped to sub-channels, i.e. the first message can be sent by on subchannels Group PRB bearer. It is understandable that since can indicate the number of PRB groups, then the second terminal device can and Determine multiple PRBs for carrying the first message, that is, a set of PRBs, which may be
  • the second terminal device may determine the above-mentioned set of frequency domain resources according to the above-mentioned set of PRBs and the number of PRBs required to carry the first message.
  • Code domain resources may be used to generate the first message, including one or more of the following: a cyclic shift code, a root sequence, a base sequence, or an orthogonal cover code.
  • a cyclic shift code is used as an example for description below.
  • the code domain resource set may be pre-configured or predefined, including multiple cyclic shift codes, such as 4, 8, or 12 cyclic shift codes, and the values of multiple cyclic shift codes may not be consecutive , to ensure the accuracy of conflict indications.
  • different cyclic shift code indices represent different collision states.
  • the code domain resource set can be a cyclic shift code ⁇ 0, 6 ⁇ .
  • the code domain resource set can be ⁇ 0, 4, 8 ⁇ .
  • the code domain resource set can be ⁇ 0, 3, 6, 9 ⁇ .
  • the code domain resource set can be ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 ⁇ .
  • the code domain resource set can be ⁇ 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 ⁇ .
  • the bit domain resource may be the number of bits occupied by the first message.
  • the set of bit-domain resources may be pre-configured or predefined, including multiple bit-domain resources, such as 4, 8 or 12 bit-domain resources.
  • Each bit field resource may be a single-bit or multi-bit field, such as 2 or 3 bits, which is not limited.
  • the second terminal device may determine the first resource according to a conflict state of the B sideline resources. For example, the second terminal device may configure a corresponding relationship between each conflict state in the above-mentioned multiple conflict states and a corresponding resource in the above-mentioned resource set. In this way, the second terminal device can traverse the corresponding relationship according to a conflict state of the B sideline resources, thereby determining the first resource corresponding to a conflict state of the B sideline resources, so that the second terminal device can use the The first resource sends the first message.
  • bit field resource can be ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ .
  • bit field resource can be ⁇ 01, 10, 11 ⁇ .
  • bit field resource can be ⁇ 00, 01, 10, 11 ⁇ .
  • bit field resources can be ⁇ 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110, 111 ⁇ .
  • bit field resources can be ⁇ 000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110, 111 ⁇ .
  • the corresponding relationship of the configuration may include:
  • the second terminal device determines that any one of the sideline resources R1-R3 is in conflict, that is, conflict state 1, it can use the cyclic shift code 0 to generate the first a message. If the second terminal device determines that the sideline resources R1-R3 are not in conflict, that is, conflict state 2, the first message may be generated using cyclic shift code 3 according to the correspondence between conflict state 2 and cyclic shift code 3.
  • the resource set includes 2 code domain resources and 1 frequency domain resource, respectively cyclic shift codes 0 and 3, and frequency domain position 1, and the B sideline resources include the 2 types in Table 1D conflict status
  • the corresponding relationship of the configuration can include:
  • the second terminal device determines that there is any conflict between the sideline resources R1-R3, that is, conflict state 1, it can use the corresponding relationship between conflict state 1-(cyclic shift code 0, frequency domain position 1) to use Cyclic shift code 0 generates the first message and transmits the first message on the PRB located at position 1 in the frequency domain. If the second terminal device determines that the sideline resources R1-R3 are not in conflict, that is, conflict state 2, the cyclic shift code 3 may be used according to the corresponding relationship between conflict state 2-(cyclic shift code 3, frequency domain position 1). A first message is generated and sent on PRB1 located at position 1 in the frequency domain.
  • the resource set includes 8 code domain resources, which are cyclic shift codes 0-7 respectively, and the B sideline resources are the 8 conflict states in Table 2A
  • the corresponding relationship of the configuration may include:
  • the first message can be generated using cyclic shift code 0 according to the corresponding relationship between conflict state 1 and cyclic shift code 0. If the second terminal device determines that the sideline resource R1 is in conflict, and the sideline resources R2-R3 do not conflict, that is, the conflict state 2, the cyclic shift code 1 may be used to generate the corresponding relationship between the conflict state 2 and the cyclic shift code 1.
  • the first message can be generated by using the cyclic shift code 7 according to the corresponding relationship between the conflict state 8 and the cyclic shift code 7. .
  • the resource set includes 2 code domain resources, 2 bit domain resources and 2 frequency domain resources, they are cyclic shift codes 0 and 1, bit fields 0 and 1, and frequency domain positions 1 and 2, respectively.
  • the B sideline resources are in the 8 conflicting states in Table 2A, the corresponding relationship of the configuration may include:
  • Collision state 6- (cyclic shift code 0, bit field 1, frequency domain position 2);
  • Collision state 7 (cyclic shift code 1, bit field 0, frequency domain position 1);
  • Collision state 8 (cyclic shift code 1, bit field 0, frequency domain position 2);
  • the second terminal device determines that the sideline resources R1-R3 are in conflict, that is, conflict state 1, then according to the corresponding relationship between conflict state 1-(cyclic shift code 0, bit field 0, frequency domain position 1), The first message is generated using cyclic shift code 0 and bit field 0 and sent on the PRB located at position 1 in the frequency domain. If the second terminal device determines that the sideline resource R1 is in conflict, and the sideline resources R2-R3 do not conflict, that is, conflict state 2, then the conflict state 2-(cyclic shift code 0, bit field 0, frequency domain position 2) The corresponding relationship of , the cyclic shift code 0 and the bit field 0 are used to generate the first message, and the first message is sent on the PRB located at the frequency domain position 2.
  • the second terminal device determines that the sideline resources R1-R3 are not in conflict, that is, the conflict state 8
  • the corresponding relationship between the conflict state 8-(cyclic shift code 1, bit field 0, frequency domain position 2) can be used.
  • the first message is generated using cyclic shift code 1 and bit field 0, and the first message is sent on the PRB located at position 2 in the frequency domain.
  • the second terminal device can quickly locate which resource is used for each conflict state by configuring the corresponding relationship between the conflict state and the resource, thereby effectively improving the processing efficiency of the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send the first message to the first terminal device at a sending opportunity corresponding to the first message.
  • the first message is sent on the closest PSFCH in the time domain, but this is not a limitation.
  • the second terminal device can send the first message at one time to indicate whether a plurality of different sideline resources conflict or not.
  • the second terminal device may send the first message multiple times to indicate whether multiple different sideline resources are in conflict, but does not as a limitation.
  • the second terminal device can not only send the first message to the first terminal device, but also can send the first message to other terminal devices, such as the second terminal device.
  • the scenarios shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3 are used as an introduction below. If terminal equipment C determines that the sideline resources R2 of terminal equipment A and terminal equipment D (not shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 ) conflict, and It is determined that the sideline resource R3 of the terminal device B and the terminal device D conflict, then the terminal device C can not only send the first message to the terminal device A to indicate the conflict of the sideline resource R2, but also can send the first message to the terminal device B. Indicates a sideline resource R3 conflict. In other words, the first message can not only indicate the resource conflict of the same terminal device, but also can indicate the resource conflict of different terminal devices, so that signaling overhead can be saved and communication efficiency can be improved.
  • the first terminal device determines a conflict state of the B sideline resources according to the first resource.
  • the first terminal device may determine the first resource bearing the first message. Specifically, if the first resource includes the first frequency domain resource, when receiving the first message, the first terminal device may determine the frequency domain location and/or data of the PRB bearing the first message, that is, determine the first frequency domain resource . If the first resource includes the first code domain resource and/or the first bit domain resource, the first terminal device may determine the first code domain resource and/or the first bit domain resource by decoding the first message. Further, the first terminal device may also configure a corresponding relationship between each conflict state in the above-mentioned multiple conflict states and a corresponding resource in the above-mentioned resource set. In this way, after determining the first resource bearing the first message, the first terminal device can traverse the corresponding relationship according to the first resource, thereby determining a conflict state of the B sideline resources corresponding to the first resource.
  • the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes cyclic shift code 0, it can determine conflict state 1 according to the corresponding relationship between conflict state 1 and cyclic shift code 0, that is, the side row resources R1-R3 conflict. . If the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes the cyclic shift code 3, it can determine the conflict state 2 according to the correspondence between the conflict state 2 and the cyclic shift code 3, that is, the sideline resources R1-R3 do not conflict.
  • the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes cyclic shift code 0 and frequency domain position 1, then according to the corresponding relationship between conflict state 1-(cyclic shift code 0, frequency domain position 1), Determine conflict state 1, that is, there is any conflict between the sideline resources R1-R3. If the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes cyclic shift code 3 and frequency domain position 1, it can determine conflict state 2 according to the corresponding relationship between conflict state 2-(cyclic shift code 3, frequency domain position 1), that is, Sideline resources R1-R3 do not conflict.
  • the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes cyclic shift code 0, it can determine conflict state 1 according to the corresponding relationship between conflict state 1 and cyclic shift code 0, that is, the side row resources R1-R3 conflict. . If the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes cyclic shift code 1, it can determine conflict state 2 according to the corresponding relationship between conflict state 2 and cyclic shift code 1, that is, the sideline resource R1 collides, and the sideline resource R2- R3 does not conflict.
  • the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes the cyclic shift code 7, it can determine the conflict state 8 according to the corresponding relationship between the conflict state 8 and the cyclic shift code 7, that is, the sideline resources R1-R3 do not conflict. .
  • the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes cyclic shift code 0, bit field 0, and frequency domain position 1, it can be determined according to the conflict state 1-(cyclic shift code 0, bit field 0, frequency domain position 1 The corresponding relationship of the domain position 1) determines the conflict state 1, that is, the side row resources R1-R3 conflict. If the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes cyclic shift code 0, bit field 0, and frequency domain position 2, it can be determined according to the corresponding conflict state 2-(cyclic shift code 0, bit field 0, frequency domain position 2) relationship, determine conflict state 2, that is, the sideline resource R1 conflicts, and the sideline resources R2-R3 do not conflict.
  • the first terminal device determines that the first resource includes cyclic shift code 1, bit field 0 and frequency domain position 2, it can be determined according to the conflict state 8-(cyclic shift code 1, bit field 0, frequency domain position 2), determine the conflict state 8, that is, the sideline resources R1-R3 do not conflict.
  • the first terminal device can quickly locate which resource is used for each conflict state by configuring the corresponding relationship between the conflict state and the resource, thereby effectively improving the processing efficiency of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can replace at least one of the conflicting sideline resources in the B sideline resources according to a conflict state of the B sideline resources.
  • a conflict state of the B sideline resources is indicated by any one of the foregoing methods 1-3
  • the first terminal device may replace the B sideline resources according to a conflict state of the B sideline resources All conflicting sideline resources in .
  • the first terminal device may replace all the B sideline resources to avoid resource conflict.
  • the first resource may indicate a conflict state of the B sideline resources as a whole, or the first resource may individually indicate each sideline resource in the B sideline resources. a state of conflict. The details are described below.
  • the overall indication refers to associating the first resource as a whole with a conflict state of the B sideline resources, so as to reduce the complexity of the corresponding relationship between the resources and the conflict state, thereby improving processing efficiency.
  • the second terminal device may use any resource or a combination of multiple resources to indicate the first sideline control information Indicates a conflicting state of reserved resources for retransmissions. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, if the B sidelink resources include: sidelink resources R2 or sidelink resources R2-R3, the second terminal device may use any resource or a combination of multiple resources, such as frequency domain resources, indicating Sideline resource R2, or a conflict state of sideline resources R2-R3.
  • the second terminal device may use any resource or a combination of multiple resources to indicate a conflict state of the first sideline resources. For example, as shown in FIG. 1 , if the B sideline resources include: sideline resources R1-R2 or sideline resources R1-R3, the second terminal device may use any resource or a combination of multiple resources, such as code domain resources , indicating a conflict state of sideline resources R1-R2, or, sideline resources R1-R3.
  • the second terminal device may use any one or more of the resources. Resource combination, indicating a conflict state between the retransmission reserved resource indicated by the first sideline control information and the second sideline resource. For example, as shown in FIG. 1 , if the B sidelink resources include: sidelink resources R3-R4 or sidelink resources R2-R4, the second terminal device may use any resource to indicate sidelink resources R3-R4, or, A conflict state of sideline resources R2-R4.
  • the second terminal device may use any resource or a combination of multiple resources to indicate the first sideline resources and the second sideline resources.
  • a conflicting state for a sideline resource For example, as shown in FIG. 1, if the B sideline resources include: sideline resources R1, R2 and R4, or sideline resources R1-R4, the second terminal device may use any resource to indicate sideline resources R1, R1, R2 and R4, or a conflicting state of sideline resources R1-R4.
  • the separate indication refers to associating various resources in the first resource with a conflict state of various sidelines in the B sideline resources respectively, so as to realize the decoupling of the resources and improve the indication accuracy.
  • the second terminal device may use the first type of resource or the first combination of multiple resources , indicating a conflict state of the retransmission reserved resources indicated by the first sideline control information, and using the second resource (different from the first resource) or the second combination of multiple resources (different from the first resource) different combinations), indicating a conflict state of the second sideline resource. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the second terminal device may use the first resource or the first combination of multiple resources, such as a combination of code domain resources and bit domain resources, to indicate sideline resource R2, or, sideline resource R2 - a conflict state of R3, and use the second resource or a second combination of multiple resources, such as frequency domain resources, to indicate a conflict state of the sideline resource R4.
  • first resource or the first combination of multiple resources such as a combination of code domain resources and bit domain resources
  • the second terminal device may use the first type of resource or multiple resources.
  • the first combination indicating a conflict state of the resource carrying the first sideline control information, and using the second type of resource or the second combination of multiple resources to indicate the replay of the first sideline control information.
  • a conflicting state for transmitting reserved resources For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the second terminal device may use the first resource or the first combination of multiple resources, such as the combination of the code domain resource and the bit domain resource, to indicate a conflict state of the sideline resource R1, and
  • the second resource or the second combination of multiple resources, such as frequency domain resources, is used to indicate the side-link resource R2, or a conflict state of the side-link resources R2-R3.
  • the second terminal device may use the first type of resource or the first combination of multiple resources to indicate the first sideline resource.
  • a conflicting state of resources and using a second resource or a second combination of resources to indicate a conflicting state of the second sideline resource.
  • the second terminal device may use the first resource or the first combination of multiple resources, such as a combination of code domain resources and bit domain resources, to indicate side row resources R1-R2, or, side row resources R1-R2
  • the second terminal device can flexibly use the first resource according to a conflict state of each sidelink resource in the B sidelink resources. For example, if some of the B sideline resources conflict, the resource corresponding to the sideline resource conflict may be used in the first resource; otherwise, the resource corresponding to the sideline resource conflict may not be used to avoid Redundant indications, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above-mentioned corresponding relationship configured by the first terminal device and the second terminal device may be: a corresponding relationship between various conflict states of different services and the same set of resources.
  • the same conflict state of different services can be indicated by the same resource, thereby reducing resource requirements.
  • first conflict state one conflict state of the B sideline resources is referred to as the first conflict state below.
  • the second terminal device may only use the same set of code domain resources to indicate resource conflicts of different services.
  • the second terminal device can configure the correspondence between each conflict state among the multiple conflict states of each service and the corresponding code domain resources in the code domain resource set, wherein the multiple conflict states correspond to the multiple code domain resources .
  • the second terminal device can determine the corresponding first code domain resource according to the corresponding relationship to indicate the first conflict state.
  • the second terminal device may also configure the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in the multiple conflict states of each service and the corresponding code domain resources in the code domain resource set, wherein the multiple conflict states correspond to multiple codes. domain resources. In this way, after determining the first code domain resource, the first terminal device can determine the first conflict state according to the corresponding relationship.
  • the code domain resource may be a cyclic shift code, but it is only an example and not limited.
  • the code domain resource may also be a root sequence, a base sequence, or an orthogonal cover code, and the subsequent examples can be understood accordingly, and will not be repeated in the following.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a mapping relationship table 3A.
  • the mapping relationship table 3A may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the cyclic shift code among the multiple conflict states of each service, as shown in the following table 3A.
  • the sideline resource R1 is the resource for detecting the SCI
  • the sideline resources R2 and R3 are reserved resources for the retransmission indicated by the detected SCI
  • the sideline resource R4 is the resource reserved for the period indicated by the detected SCI.
  • the conflict indication mode 3 represents one of four types: only the sideline resource R1 conflicts, only the sideline resource R2 conflicts, the sideline resources R1 and R2 conflict, and neither conflict.
  • the conflict indication mode 3 represents one of four types: only the sideline resource R4 conflicts, only the sideline resource R2 conflicts, the sideline resources R4 and R2 conflict, and neither conflict.
  • the conflict indication mode 4 indicates that only the sideline resource R1 conflicts, only the sideline resource R2 conflicts, only the sideline resource R3 conflicts, only the sideline resources R1 and R2 conflict, and only the sideline resource R1- One of the eight types of R3 conflict, only sideline resources R2 and R3 conflict, sideline resources R1-R3 conflict, and none of them conflict.
  • conflict indication mode 4 indicates that only the sideline resource R4 conflicts, only the sideline resource R2 conflicts, only the sideline resource R3 conflicts, only the sideline resources R4 and R2 conflict, and only the sideline resources R4 and R3 conflict. , Only one of the eight types of conflict between sideline resources R2 and R3, sideline resources R2-R4 conflict, and neither conflict.
  • the indication manner shown in Table 3A can be regarded as ACK-NACK.
  • the second terminal device determines that the sideline resources R2 and R1/R4 conflict, it can be determined from Table 3A that the value of the corresponding cyclic shift code is equal to 6, so that the The shift code generates the first message.
  • the first terminal device may determine the conflict between the sideline resources R2 and R1/R4 from Table 3A according to the value of the cyclic shift code being equal to 6.
  • the second terminal device determines that the sideline resource R3 is in conflict, it can determine from Table 3A that the value of the corresponding cyclic shift code is equal to 2, so as to generate the first message by using the cyclic shift code value of 2.
  • the first terminal device may determine the sideline resource R3 conflict from Table 3A according to the value of the cyclic shift code being equal to 2.
  • the code domain resource may be a cyclic shift code.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a mapping relationship table 3B.
  • the mapping relationship table 3B may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the cyclic shift code among the multiple conflict states of each service, as shown in the following table 3B.
  • the time-frequency resource R1 is the resource for detecting the SCI
  • the time-frequency resources R2 and R3 are reserved resources for the retransmission indicated by the detected SCI
  • the time-frequency resource R4 is the resource reserved for the period indicated by the SCI detected.
  • the conflict indication mode 3 represents one of three types: only the time-frequency resource R1 collides, only the time-frequency resource R2 collides, and the time-frequency resources R1 and R2 collide.
  • the conflict indication mode 3 indicates that only the time-frequency resource R4 collides, only the time-frequency resource R2 collides, and the time-frequency resource R4 and R2 collide.
  • the conflict indication mode 4 indicates that only the time-frequency resource R1 conflicts, only the time-frequency resource R2 conflicts, only the time-frequency resource R3 conflicts, only the time-frequency resources R1 and R2 conflict, and only the time-frequency resources R1 and R2 conflict.
  • the conflict indication mode 4 indicates that only the time-frequency resource R4 conflicts, only the time-frequency resource R2 conflicts, only the time-frequency resource R3 conflicts, only the time-frequency resources R4 and R2 conflict, and only the time-frequency resources R4 and R3 conflict. , only one of the seven types of conflict between time-frequency resources R2 and R3, and conflict between time-frequency resources R2-R4.
  • the indication mode shown in Table 3B can be regarded as ACK only.
  • the meanings of the pre-collision indication and the post-collision indication in the following Tables 4A-10C reference may be made to the above descriptions of Table 3A and Table 3B, which will not be repeated hereafter.
  • the second terminal device determines that there is no conflict, it can be determined according to Table 3B that no indication is required. For another example, if the second terminal device determines that only the sideline resource R3 collides, it can be determined from Table 3B that the value of the corresponding cyclic shift code is equal to 2, so as to generate the first message by using the cyclic shift code whose value is 2. . Correspondingly, after receiving the first message, the first terminal device may determine the sideline resource R3 conflict from Table 3B according to the value of the cyclic shift code being equal to 2.
  • the second terminal device may only use the same set of frequency domain resources to indicate resource conflicts of different services.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device may configure the correspondence between each conflict state of the above-mentioned multiple conflict states and the corresponding PRBs in the PRB set, for example, configure each conflict state and the first frequency domain resource index
  • the corresponding relationship of , wherein, multiple conflict states may correspond to multiple first frequency domain resource indexes, and the corresponding relationship between each first frequency domain resource index and the PRBs in the PRB set is configured.
  • the second terminal device can determine the first frequency domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of the conflict state, and then determine the corresponding first PRB according to the corresponding relationship of the first frequency domain resource index,
  • the first conflict state is indicated by the first frequency domain resource corresponding to the first PRB.
  • the first terminal device can determine the first frequency domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of the first PRB corresponding to the first frequency domain resource, so as to determine the first frequency domain resource index according to the first frequency domain resource index. Corresponding relationship, determine the first conflict state.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a mapping relationship table 4A.
  • the mapping relationship table 4A can indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in the multiple conflict states of each service and the first frequency domain resource index, that is, with the PRB index, as shown in the following table 4A.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a mapping relationship table 4B.
  • the mapping relationship table 4B may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state among the multiple conflict states of each service and the first frequency domain resource index, as shown in the following table 4B.
  • the second terminal device determines that there is no conflict, it can be determined according to Table 4B that no indication is required.
  • the second terminal device may only use the same set of bit field resources to indicate resource conflicts of different services.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device can configure the correspondence between each conflict state of the above-mentioned multiple conflict states and the corresponding bit domain resources in the bit domain resource set, for example, configure each conflict state and the first Correspondence of bit-domain resource indices, wherein multiple conflict states may correspond to multiple first bit-domain resource indices, and a correspondence between each first bit-domain resource index and the bit-domain resources in the bit-domain resource set is configured.
  • the second terminal device can determine the first bit field resource index according to the corresponding relationship between the conflict states, and then determine the corresponding first bit field according to the corresponding relationship between the first bit field resource indexes resource to indicate the first conflict state.
  • the first terminal device can determine the first bit domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of the first bit domain resource, so as to determine the first bit domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of the first bit domain resource index. a conflict state.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a mapping relationship table 5A.
  • the mapping relationship table 5A can indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in the multiple conflict states of each service and the first bit domain resource index, that is, the corresponding relationship with the bit index, as shown in the following table 5A.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a mapping relationship table 5B.
  • the mapping relationship table 5B can indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in the multiple conflict states of each service and the first bit field resource, as shown in the following table 5B.
  • the second terminal device determines that there is no conflict, it can be determined according to Table 5B that no indication is required.
  • the second terminal device may use the following multiple resources: code domain resources, frequency domain resources, or a combination of bit domain resources to indicate resource conflict.
  • code domain resources code domain resources
  • frequency domain resources or a combination of bit domain resources to indicate resource conflict.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device may configure each conflict state of the above-mentioned multiple conflict states, respectively, corresponding to the code domain resources in the code domain resource set and the corresponding frequency domain resources in the frequency domain resource set. relation. For example, the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the combination index is configured, and the corresponding relationship between each combination index and the corresponding code domain resource in the code domain resource set and the corresponding frequency domain resource in the frequency domain resource set is configured. In this way, after determining the first conflict state, the second terminal device can determine the combination index corresponding to the first conflict state according to the corresponding relationship, so as to determine the first code domain resource and the first frequency domain resource corresponding to the combination index according to the corresponding relationship , to indicate the first conflict state.
  • the second terminal device can determine the first code domain resource and the first frequency domain according to the corresponding relationship between the combination index and the resource.
  • the combination index corresponding to the resource is used to determine the first conflict state according to the corresponding relationship between the combination index corresponding to the first code domain resource and the first frequency domain resource and the conflict state.
  • the code domain resource may be a cyclic shift code.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 6A.
  • the mapping relationship table 6A may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the combined index resource (C i ), as shown in the following table 6A.
  • the value of C i is 0 to the number of code domain resources Multiply by the number of PRB resources Subtract 1 again, that is
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are also configured with a mapping relationship table 6B.
  • the mapping relationship table 6B may indicate the corresponding relationship between each combination index and the code domain resource and the first frequency domain resource index, as shown in the following table 6B.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 6C.
  • the mapping relationship table 6C may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the combined index resource, as shown in the following table 6C.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are also configured with a mapping relationship table 6B.
  • the mapping relationship table 6B may indicate the corresponding relationship between each combination index and the code domain resource and the first frequency domain resource index, as shown in the above table 6B.
  • the second terminal device determines that there is no conflict, it may be determined according to Table 6C that no indication is required.
  • the above-mentioned corresponding relationship configured by the first terminal device and the second terminal device may also be: various conflict states of different services and different resource groups.
  • the same conflict state of different services can be indicated by different resources, thereby avoiding false indication and improving indication accuracy.
  • the second terminal device may determine the first resource index according to the first service identifier indicated by the first sideline control information, so as to determine the first resource according to the first resource index and the first conflict state.
  • the first resource index and the first service identifier may satisfy the following relationship:
  • R ID (X) mod R RCI (4)
  • R ID is the first resource index
  • X is the first service identifier
  • R RCI is the number of resources in the above resource set.
  • the specific implementation of the first resource index and the number of resources may refer to the following scenarios 1-4.
  • the number of resources used in formula (4) can be relatively more, so as to avoid the same modulo results of different service identifiers, thereby avoiding false indications and improving the accuracy of indications.
  • the modulo result of the service identifier equal to 4 and the service identifier equal to 6 is the same, both being 2, which may lead to false indications.
  • the number of resources is equal to 10
  • the result of taking the modulo of the service identifier equal to 4 is 4
  • the result of taking the modulo of the service identifier equal to 6 is 6, so that false indications can be avoided.
  • the relationship shown in the above formula (4) is only an exemplary manner, and is not intended to be limiting.
  • the first resource index and the first service identifier may also satisfy the following relationship:
  • R ID (R' ID +X) mod R RCI (5)
  • R ID is the first resource index
  • R' ID is the index corresponding to the first conflict state
  • X is the first service identifier
  • R RCI is the number of resources in the above resource set.
  • the second terminal device may configure different code domain resources.
  • It may be a network device, such as pre-configured by a base station, and may be 1, 2, 3, or 6, etc.
  • Each code domain resource is combined with one code domain resource corresponding to each of the above conflict states, so that each conflict state can correspond to multiple code domain resources, so that the same conflict state of different services can be indicated by different code domain resources.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device can be configured Each code domain resource index in the code domain resource indices has a corresponding relationship with the code domain resources in the code domain resource set, so that the code domain resources corresponding to different code domain resource indices may be different. And, the first terminal device and the second terminal device may further configure the corresponding relationship between the code domain resources and the code domain resource groups. In this way, the first terminal device and the second terminal device can determine the code domain resource corresponding to each code domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of each code domain resource index.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device may combine the code domain resources corresponding to each code domain resource index with the above-mentioned multiple code domain resources according to the corresponding relationship between the code domain resources and the code domain resource groups, for example, code domain
  • code domain By adding up the values, a code domain resource group corresponding to each code domain resource index can be determined, thereby dividing the above code domain resource set into different multiple code domain resource groups.
  • the code domain resources in each code domain resource group can be different due to the different code domain resources corresponding to the code domain resource index, so that the same conflict state of different services can be indicated by the code domain resources of different code domain resource groups, and then It can avoid wrong instructions and improve the accuracy of instructions.
  • the second terminal device can determine the first code field corresponding to the first service identifier according to the above formula (4), the first service identifier and the number of resources.
  • Resource index the number of resources can be The product of the number of the above multiple PRBs, The product of the number of the above-mentioned multiple bit-field resources, or It is the product of the number of the above-mentioned plurality of bit-field resources and the above-mentioned plurality of PRBs.
  • the first code domain resource index may correspond to the first code domain resource group in the above-mentioned multiple code domain resource groups.
  • the first code domain resource group may be used to indicate the above-mentioned various conflict states.
  • the second terminal device may determine the code domain resource corresponding to the first code domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of each code domain resource index. Further, the second terminal device may combine the code domain resource corresponding to the first code domain resource index and the code domain resource corresponding to the above-mentioned first conflict state according to the corresponding relationship between the code domain resource and the code domain resource group, such as performing code By adding the values, the first code domain resource can be determined.
  • the first code domain resource belongs to the above-mentioned first code domain resource group, and can be used to indicate the first conflict state.
  • the first terminal device may first determine the first service identifier corresponding to the first service identifier according to the above formula (4), the first service identifier in the first message, and the number of resources in scenario 1.
  • a code domain resource index may be determined.
  • the first terminal device may determine the code domain resource corresponding to the first code domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of each code domain resource index.
  • the first terminal device may combine the code domain resource corresponding to the first code domain resource index with the first code domain resource according to the corresponding relationship between the code domain resource and the code domain resource group, such as performing code value subtraction, to obtain the code value.
  • a code domain resource for determining the first collision state may be determined. In this way, the first terminal device can determine the first conflict state corresponding to the first service according to the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the code domain resources.
  • the code domain resource is a cyclic shift code
  • the code domain resource index is a cyclic shift code index, but it is only an example and not limited.
  • the code domain resource can also be a root sequence, a base sequence, or an orthogonal cover code
  • the code domain resource index can correspond to a root sequence index, a base sequence index, or an orthogonal cover code index, and the following examples can be understood accordingly , and will not be repeated here.
  • the first matrix used for the modulo operation can be as shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 7 is the execution direction of the modulo operation.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 7A.
  • the mapping relationship table 7A may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the cyclic shift code in each conflict indication manner, as shown in the following table 7A.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 7B.
  • the mapping relationship table 7B can indicate the corresponding relationship between each cyclic shift code index and cyclic shift code, as well as the corresponding relationship between each cyclic shift code index, each conflict indication mode and the number of groups, as follows shown in Table 7B.
  • m 0 in Table 7B may be a variable, which is used to represent the cyclic shift code corresponding to each cyclic shift code index mentioned above.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the code domain resource is a cyclic shift code
  • the code domain resource index is a cyclic shift code index
  • the second matrix used for the modulo operation can be as shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 8 is the execution direction of the modulo operation.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 7C.
  • the mapping relationship table 7C may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in each conflict indication manner and the cyclic shift code, as shown in the following table 7C.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 7D.
  • the mapping table 7D can indicate the corresponding relationship between each cyclic shift code index and the cyclic shift code, as well as the corresponding relationship between each cyclic shift code index, each conflict indication mode and the number of groups, as follows shown in Table 7D.
  • m 0 in Table 7D may be a variable, and may also be used to represent the cyclic shift code corresponding to each cyclic shift code index described above.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the second terminal device can configure different second frequency domain resource indices.
  • the second frequency domain resource index may be used for resource grouping. It can be configured by a network device, and can be 1, 2, 3, or 6, etc. In this way, the second terminal device passes The second frequency domain resource indices are respectively combined with one first frequency domain resource index corresponding to each conflict state, so that each conflict state can correspond to different frequency domain resource indices, thereby corresponding to different frequency domain resources, so that different services can be The same conflict state can be indicated by different frequency domain resources.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device can be configured Each second frequency domain resource index in the second frequency domain resource index has a corresponding relationship with the first frequency domain resource index, so that the second frequency domain resource index corresponding to the first frequency domain resource index may be different. And, the first terminal device and the second terminal device may further configure the correspondence between the first frequency domain resource index and the third frequency domain resource index. In this way, the first terminal device and the second terminal device can determine the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to each second frequency domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship between the second frequency domain resource indices.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device can compare the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to each second frequency domain resource index with the above-mentioned multiple first frequency domain resources according to the corresponding relationship of the third frequency domain resource index. For index combination, if index addition is performed, a third frequency domain resource index set corresponding to each second frequency domain resource index can be determined.
  • each third frequency domain resource index set may correspond to one PRB group, multiple PRB groups can be determined in this way, so as to realize the division of the PRB set, and establish each of them.
  • different third frequency domain resource indices can be obtained by combining the first frequency domain resource indices corresponding to different second frequency domain resource indices, so that the PRBs in each PRB group can be determined by the third frequency domain resource indices. Different from different, so that the same conflict state of different services can be indicated by frequency domain resources of different PRB groups, thereby avoiding false indication and improving indication accuracy.
  • the second terminal device can determine the second frequency domain resource corresponding to the first service identifier according to the above formula (4), the first service identifier and the number of resources. index.
  • the number of resources can be The product of the number of the above-mentioned multiple code domain resources, The product of the number of the above-mentioned multiple bit-field resources, or It is the product of the number of the above-mentioned multiple bit-domain resources and the above-mentioned multiple code-domain resources.
  • the second frequency domain resource index corresponding to the first service identifier may correspond to the first PRB group in the above-mentioned multiple PRB groups.
  • the first PRB group may be used to indicate the above-mentioned various conflict states of the first service.
  • the second terminal device may determine the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to the second frequency domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of the second frequency domain resource index. Further, the second terminal device may, according to the corresponding relationship of the third frequency domain resource index, the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to the second frequency domain resource index, and the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to the above-mentioned first conflict state. Combining, such as index addition, the third frequency domain resource index can be determined. In this way, the second terminal device may determine the first frequency domain resource corresponding to the third frequency domain resource index according to the correspondence between each third frequency domain resource index set and one PRB group to indicate the first conflict state.
  • the first terminal device can determine the second service identifier corresponding to the first service identifier according to the above formula (4), the first service identifier in the first message, and the number of resources in scenario 1. Frequency domain resource index. Then, the first terminal device may determine the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to the second frequency domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of each second frequency domain resource index. And, the first terminal device may determine the third frequency domain resource index corresponding to the first frequency domain resource according to the corresponding relationship between each third frequency domain resource index set and one PRB group.
  • the first terminal device may convert the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to the second frequency domain resource index to the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to the first frequency domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship between the first frequency domain resource index and the third frequency domain resource index.
  • the third frequency domain resource index combination such as index subtraction, is to obtain a first frequency domain resource index that can be used to determine the first conflict state. In this way, the first terminal device can determine the first conflict state corresponding to the first service according to the correspondence between each conflict state and the first frequency domain resource index.
  • the following describes the corresponding relationship between the frequency domain resource index and the frequency domain resource through two examples in conjunction with the sideline resources R1-R3 or the sideline resources R2-R4 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the third matrix used for the modulo operation can be as shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 9 is the execution direction of the modulo operation.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 8A.
  • the mapping relationship table 8A may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in each conflict indication manner and the first frequency domain resource index, that is, the PRB index, as shown in the following table 8A.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 8B.
  • the mapping relationship table 8B may indicate the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to each second frequency domain resource index, and indicate the relationship between each first frequency domain resource index, each conflict indication method and the number of groups The corresponding relationship is shown in Table 8B below.
  • m 0 in Table 8B may be a variable, and may be used to represent the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to each of the foregoing second frequency domain resource indices.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the corresponding frequency domain resource indication is sent, and the first message is sent on the PRB corresponding to the third frequency domain resource index, so that the same resource conflict of different services can be indicated by different frequency domain resources.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the fourth matrix used for the modulo operation can be as shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 10 is the execution direction of the modulo operation.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 8C.
  • the mapping relationship table 8C may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in each conflict indication manner and the first frequency domain resource index, that is, the PRB index, as shown in the following table 8C.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 8D.
  • the mapping relationship table 8D may indicate the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to each second frequency domain resource index, and indicate the relationship between each first frequency domain resource index, each conflict indication mode and the number of groups The corresponding relationship is shown in Table 8D below.
  • m 0 in Table 8B may be a variable, and may be used to represent the first frequency domain resource index corresponding to each of the foregoing second frequency domain resource indices.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the second terminal device can configure different second bit field resource indices.
  • the second bit field resource index can be used for resource grouping. It can be configured by a network device, and can be 1, 2, 3, or 6, etc. In this way, the second terminal device passes The second bit domain resource index is combined with a first bit domain resource index corresponding to each conflict state, so that each conflict state can correspond to a different bit domain resource index, thereby corresponding to different bit domain resources, so that different services can be The same collision state can be indicated by different bit field resources.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device can be configured Each of the second bit-domain resource indices in the second bit-domain resource indices has a corresponding relationship with the first bit-domain resource index, so that the first bit-domain resource indices corresponding to different second-bit domain resource indices may be different. And, the first terminal device and the second terminal device may further configure the correspondence between the first bit domain resource index and the third bit domain resource index. In this way, the first terminal device and the second terminal device can determine the first bit-domain resource index corresponding to each second bit-domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship between the second bit-domain resource indices.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device may, according to the corresponding relationship of the third bit domain resource index, compare the first bit domain resource index corresponding to each second bit domain resource index with the above-mentioned various first bit domain resources For index combination, if index addition is performed, a third bit domain resource index set corresponding to each second bit domain resource index can be determined. Wherein, since each third bit-domain resource index set corresponds to one bit-domain resource group, multiple bit-domain resource groups can be determined in this way, so as to realize the division of the bit-domain resource sets.
  • different third bit domain resource indices can be obtained by combining the first bit domain resource indices corresponding to different second bit domain resource indices, so that the bit domain resources in each bit domain resource group can be affected by the third bit domain resource index.
  • the bit-field resource indexes are different from each other, so that the same conflict state of different services can be indicated by the bit-field resources of different bit-field resource groups, thereby avoiding false indications and improving indication accuracy.
  • the second terminal device can determine the second bit field corresponding to the first service identifier according to the above formula (4), the first terminal service identifier and the number of resources.
  • Resource index can be The product of the number of the above-mentioned multiple code domain resources, The product of the number of the above-mentioned multiple frequency domain resources, or It is the product of the number of the above-mentioned multiple frequency domain resources and the above-mentioned multiple code domain resources.
  • the second bit-domain resource index corresponding to the first service identifier may correspond to the first bit-domain resource group in the above-mentioned multiple bit-domain resource groups.
  • the first bit field resource group may be used to indicate the above-mentioned various conflict states of the first service.
  • the second terminal device may determine the first bit domain resource index corresponding to the second bit domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of the second bit domain resource index. Further, the second terminal device may, according to the corresponding relationship of the third frequency domain resource index, the first bit domain resource index corresponding to the second bit domain resource index, and the first bit domain resource index corresponding to the above-mentioned first conflict state. Combining, such as adding, can determine the third bit domain resource index. In this way, the second terminal device may determine the above-mentioned first bit domain resource corresponding to the third bit domain resource index according to the correspondence between each third bit domain resource index set and one bit domain resource group to indicate the first conflict state.
  • the first terminal device can determine the second service identifier corresponding to the first service identifier according to the above formula (4), the first service identifier in the first message, and the number of resources in scenario 1. Bit field resource index. Then, the first terminal device may determine the first bit domain resource index corresponding to the second bit domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of each second bit domain resource index. And, the first terminal device may determine the third bit domain resource index corresponding to the first bit domain resource according to the correspondence between each third bit domain resource index set and one bit domain resource group.
  • the first terminal device may, according to the correspondence between the first bit domain resource index and the third bit domain resource index, convert the first bit domain resource index corresponding to the second bit domain resource index to the first bit domain resource index corresponding to the first bit domain resource index.
  • the third bit-domain resource index combination such as performing index subtraction, to obtain a first bit-domain resource index that can be used to determine the first conflict state. In this way, the first terminal device can determine the first conflict state corresponding to the first service according to the correspondence between each conflict state and the first bit field resource index.
  • bit domain resource index For ease of understanding, the following describes the corresponding relationship between the bit domain resource index and the bit domain resource through two examples in conjunction with the side row resources R1-R3 or the side row resources R2-R4 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the fifth matrix used for the modulo operation can be as shown in FIG. 11 .
  • the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 11 is the execution direction of the modulo operation.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 9A.
  • the mapping relationship table 9A can indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in each conflict indication manner and the first bit domain resource index, that is, the bit index, as shown in the following table 9A.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 9B.
  • the mapping relationship table 9B can indicate the corresponding relationship of the first bit domain resource index corresponding to each second bit domain resource index, and indicate the relationship between each first bit domain resource index, each conflict indication mode and the number of groups The corresponding relationship is shown in Table 9B below.
  • m0 in Table 9B may be a variable, and may be used to represent the first bit-domain resource index corresponding to each second bit-domain resource index described above.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the second terminal device determines from Table 9A that only the sideline resources R2 and R1/R4 conflict with the first service.
  • the corresponding bit field resources are indicated, so that the same resource conflict of different services can be indicated by different bit field resources.
  • the sixth matrix used for the modulo operation can be as shown in FIG. 12 .
  • the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 12 is the execution direction of the modulo operation.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 9C.
  • the mapping relationship table 9C can indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in each conflict indication manner and the first bit domain resource index, that is, the bit index, as shown in the following table 9C.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 9D.
  • the mapping table 9D can indicate the corresponding relationship between the first bit domain resource index corresponding to each second bit domain resource index, and indicate the relationship between each first bit domain resource index, each conflict indication mode and the number of groups The corresponding relationship is shown in Table 9D below.
  • m 0 in Table 9D may be a variable, and may be used to represent the first bit domain resource index corresponding to each second bit domain resource index described above.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the second terminal device may use the following multiple resources: code domain resources, frequency domain resources, or a combination of bit domain resources to indicate resource conflict.
  • code domain resources code domain resources
  • frequency domain resources or a combination of bit domain resources to indicate resource conflict.
  • bit domain resources code domain resources
  • the following description is given by taking the second terminal device as an example to indicate a resource conflict using a combination of code domain resources and frequency domain resources.
  • the second terminal device may indicate the resource conflict in the manner of resource grouping.
  • the second terminal device may also use resource grouping or non-grouping to indicate resource conflict, and the combination of grouping or non-grouping may include the following multiple ways: using the same Groups of code domain resources and different groups of frequency domain resources are used to indicate resource conflicts of different services (combination method 1), and different groups of code domain resources and the same group of frequency domain resources can be used to indicate resource conflicts of different services (combination method 2), or use different groups of code domain resources and different groups of frequency domain resources to indicate resource conflicts of different services (combination mode 3).
  • the following takes the combination mode 1 as an example for introduction.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device may be based on There are different code domain resources, and the above code domain resource set is divided into multiple code domain resource groups, so that the same conflict state of different services can be indicated by a frequency domain resource and code domain resources of different code domain resource groups. , so as to avoid misinstructions and improve the accuracy of instructions.
  • code domain resource group For the specific implementation of determining the code domain resource group, reference may be made to the above scenario 1, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device may also configure each conflict state of the above-mentioned multiple conflict states, corresponding to the code domain resources in the code domain resource set and the corresponding frequency domain in the frequency domain resource set.
  • Correspondence of resources For example, the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the combination index is configured, and the corresponding relationship between each combination index and the corresponding code domain resource in the code domain resource set and the corresponding frequency domain resource in the frequency domain resource set are respectively configured.
  • the second terminal device may determine the first code domain resource index corresponding to the first service identifier according to the above formula (4), the first service identifier and the resource quantity. Then, the second terminal device may determine the code domain resource corresponding to the first code domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of each code domain resource index. Further, the second terminal device may determine the combination index corresponding to the first conflict state, and determine the code domain resource and the first frequency domain resource corresponding to the combination index according to the corresponding relationship of the combination index. In this way, the second terminal device can combine the code domain resource corresponding to the first code domain resource index and the code domain resource corresponding to the combination index according to the corresponding relationship between the code domain resource and the code domain resource group. The first code domain resource may be determined, so that the first conflict state is indicated by the first code domain resource and the first frequency domain resource.
  • the first terminal device can determine the first service identifier corresponding to the first service identifier according to the above formula (4), the first service identifier in the first message, and the number of resources in scenario 1. Code domain resource index. Then, the first terminal device may determine the code domain resource corresponding to the first code domain resource index according to the corresponding relationship of each code domain resource index. And, the first terminal device may combine the code domain resource corresponding to the first code domain resource index with the first code domain resource according to the corresponding relationship between the code domain resource and the code domain resource group, such as subtracting the code value, to obtain Code domain resources that can be used to determine the first conflict state. In this way, the first terminal device can determine the first conflict state corresponding to the first service according to the corresponding relationship between each conflict state and the combination index, and the corresponding relationship between each combination index and the code domain resource and the frequency domain resource.
  • the code domain resource is a cyclic shift code
  • the code domain resource index is a cyclic shift code index
  • the first matrix used for the modulo operation can also be as shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are configured with a mapping relationship table 10A.
  • the mapping relationship table 10A may indicate the corresponding relationship between each conflict state in each conflict indication manner and the combined index resource (C i ), as shown in the following table 10A.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are also configured with a mapping relationship table 10B.
  • the mapping relationship table 10B may indicate the corresponding relationship between each combination index and the cyclic shift code and the frequency domain resource index, as shown in the following table 10B.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are also configured with a mapping relationship table 10C.
  • the mapping table 10C can indicate the corresponding relationship between each cyclic shift code index and the cyclic shift code, as well as the corresponding relationship between each cyclic shift code index, each conflict indication mode and the number of groups, as follows shown in Table 10C.
  • m 0 in Table 10C may be a variable, which is used to represent the cyclic shift code corresponding to each cyclic shift code index mentioned above.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the same resource conflict can be indicated by different code domain resources and frequency domain resources.
  • the first terminal device is configured with and conflict indication mode 3.
  • the second terminal device may not only determine the positions of the above-mentioned A lateral resources, but also determine the positions of the other P lateral resources, and determine the positions of the P lateral resources according to the positions of the P lateral resources.
  • a conflict state of the B sideline resources is determined.
  • the P sideline resources may include: a third sideline resource and a fourth sideline resource.
  • the third sideline resources may include: resources bearing the second sideline control information and/or retransmission reserved resources indicated by the second sideline control information.
  • the specific implementation of the second side row control information may refer to the following two design solutions.
  • the number of reserved resources for retransmission may be one or two, and may be located in the second period.
  • the second period may be a resource bearing the second sideline control information, such as the period in which the TB is located, or may be a period after the period, which is not limited.
  • the resources bearing the second sideline control information may be sideline resources R1
  • the retransmission reserved resources indicated by the second sideline control information may be sideline resources R2 and/or R3.
  • the fourth sideline resource may be a periodically reserved resource of the third sideline resource, for example, may be a periodically reserved resource of the resource bearing the second sideline control information, and/or, the retransmission indicated by the second sideline control information Period of Reserving Resources
  • the reserved resources are located in the bth period after the second period, where b is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the fourth sideline resource may be a periodically reserved resource of sideline resource R1, such as sideline resource R4.
  • the second terminal device may receive the second sideline control information from the third terminal device.
  • the second sideline control information may indicate the positions of the P sideline resources, which may be one or more of the following: SCI message, MAC CE message, RRC message, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the second sideline control information may include one or more of the following: second time domain resource allocation information, second frequency domain resource allocation information, second time-frequency resource reservation period information, second service identifier and first 2. Business priority information.
  • the second time domain resource allocation information may be used to indicate: the time domain position of the third sideline resource, such as the time slot where the third sideline resource is located.
  • the second frequency-domain resource allocation information may be used to indicate: the frequency-domain location of the third sidelink resource, such as information on subchannels occupied by the third sidelink resource.
  • the second time-frequency resource reservation period information may be used to indicate the period of the second sideline control information, and the period may also be [1:99], 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 , 1000 ms, etc.
  • the second sidelink control information can indicate the location of the third sidelink resource through the second time-frequency resource allocation information and the second time-frequency resource allocation information, and the position of the third sidelink resource and the second time-frequency resource can be used to indicate the location of the third sidelink resource. Reservation period information, indicating the location of the fourth sideline resource. In this way, the second terminal device can determine the positions of the P sidelink resources according to the indication of the second sidelink control information.
  • the second service identifier may be used to indicate the second service, and the second service may be the same as or different from the first service.
  • the second service identifier may also be one or more of the following: source ID, destination ID, member ID, priority, and the like. Specifically, it may be the source ID, destination ID, member ID, priority, etc. indicated in the second control information.
  • the priority information of the second service may be used to indicate the priority of the second service.
  • the second terminal device may send the second sideline control information message, such as sending the second sideline control information message to the first terminal device or the third terminal device.
  • the second sideline control information message may also indicate the positions of the P sideline resources.
  • the second terminal device may, according to the positions of the A sideline resources and the positions of the P sideline resources, for example, according to the positional relationship between each of the A sideline resources and the P sideline resources, respectively.
  • a conflict state (hereinafter referred to as the first conflict state) of B sideline resources among the A sideline resources is determined according to a preset conflict indication manner, where B is a positive integer less than or equal to A.
  • a conflict state of the B sideline resources may be determined by the second terminal device according to the priority of the first service and the priority of the second service. For example, if the priority of the first service is lower than the priority of the second service, the second terminal device may determine the first conflict state of the B sideline resources, and instruct the terminal device corresponding to the first service, such as the first terminal equipment. Conversely, if the priority of the first service is higher than the priority of the second service, the second terminal device may determine a conflict state of Q sidelink resources among the P sidelink resources, and indicate the terminal corresponding to the second service. equipment, such as third terminal equipment. In other words, the second terminal device may instruct the low-priority service to replace the sideline resource, so as to ensure the stability of the high-priority service. It should be understood that the above method of determining the priority is only an example, and is not intended to be a limitation.
  • the first service identifier and/or the priority information of the first service may be used to instruct the receiving device, such as the first terminal device and/or the third terminal device, to determine whether to process the first message. For example, if the receiving device determines that the first service identifier is the same as the service identifier of the receiving device, the first message is processed; otherwise, the first message is discarded. For another example, if the receiving device determines, according to the priority information of the first service, that the priority level of the first service is equal to or lower than the priority level of the service of the receiving device, the first message is processed; otherwise, the first message is discarded. . For another example, if the receiving device determines, according to the priority information of the first service, that the priority value of the first service is greater than or equal to the priority value of the service of the receiving device, the first message is processed; otherwise, the first message is discarded.
  • a conflict state of the B sideline resources is indicated by the first resource, so that the corresponding device, such as the first terminal device, after receiving the first message, can carry the first message according to the first message.
  • the first resource identifies whether resources in the B sideline resources conflict, so as to avoid signal interference and data loss caused by the resource conflict in time, thereby improving the reliability of sidechain communication.
  • the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application has been described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 12 .
  • a communication apparatus for executing the communication method provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 15 .
  • FIG. 13 is a first structural schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 includes: a transceiver module 1301 and a processing module 1302 .
  • FIG. 13 only shows the main components of the communication device.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 5 to perform the function of the first terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the transceiver module 1301 is used to execute S601 and S602.
  • the processing module 1302 is configured to execute S603.
  • the transceiver module 1301 may include a receiving module and a transmitting module (not shown in FIG. 13 ).
  • the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1300 .
  • the sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1300 .
  • the communication apparatus 1300 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 13 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1301 executes the program or instruction, the communication apparatus 1300 can perform the function of receiving the first message in the communication method shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the processing module 1302 involved in the communication apparatus 1300 may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and may be a processor or a processing unit;
  • the transceiver module 1301 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component, and may be a transceiver module Receiver or Transceiver Unit.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 may be terminal equipment or network equipment, may also be a chip (system) or other components or components that may be provided in the terminal equipment or network equipment, or may be an apparatus including terminal equipment or network equipment , which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a second schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1400 includes: a receiving module 1401 and a sending module 1402 .
  • FIG. 14 only shows the main components of the communication device.
  • the communication apparatus 1400 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 5 to perform the function of the second terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the receiving module 1401 is used for executing S601.
  • the sending module 1402 is configured to execute S602.
  • the receiving module 1401 and the sending module 1402 may also be integrated into one module, such as a transceiver module (not shown in FIG. 14 ).
  • the transceiver module is used to implement the sending function and the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
  • the communication apparatus 1400 may further include a processing module 1403 (shown with a dashed box in FIG. 14 ).
  • the processing module 1403 is used to implement the processing function of the communication device 1400 .
  • the communication apparatus 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the receiving module 1401 executes the program or instruction
  • the communication device 1400 can perform the function of receiving the first sideline control information and sending the first message in the communication method shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the processing module 1403 involved in the communication apparatus 1400 may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and may be a processor or a processing unit;
  • the transceiver module may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component, and may be a transceiver or transceiver unit.
  • the communication apparatus 1400 may be terminal equipment or network equipment, may also be a chip (system) or other components or components that may be provided in the terminal equipment or network equipment, or may be an apparatus including terminal equipment or network equipment , which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 15 is a third schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be a terminal device or a network device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or assemblies that can be provided in the terminal device or the network device.
  • the communication apparatus 1500 may include a processor 1501 .
  • the communication device 1500 may further include a memory 1502 and/or a transceiver 1503 .
  • the processor 1501 is coupled with the memory 1502 and the transceiver 1503, such as can be connected through a communication bus.
  • the components of the communication device 1500 are described in detail below with reference to FIG. 15 :
  • the processor 1501 is the control center of the communication device 1500, which may be one processor or a general term for multiple processing elements.
  • the processor 1501 is one or more central processing units (CPUs), may also be an application specific integrated circuit (ASCI), or is configured to implement one or more of the embodiments of the present application
  • An integrated circuit such as: one or more microprocessors (digital signal processor, DSP), or, one or more field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA).
  • the processor 1501 may execute various functions of the communication device 1500 by running or executing software programs stored in the memory 1502 and calling data stored in the memory 1502 .
  • the processor 1501 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 shown in FIG. 15 .
  • the communication apparatus 1500 may also include multiple processors, for example, the processor 1501 and the processor 1504 shown in FIG. 15 .
  • processors can be a single-core processor (single-CPU) or a multi-core processor (multi-CPU).
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
  • the memory 1502 is used to store the software program for executing the solution of the present application, and is controlled and executed by the processor 1501.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store the software program for executing the solution of the present application, and is controlled and executed by the processor 1501.
  • memory 1502 may be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types of static storage devices that can store information and instructions.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • Other types of dynamic storage devices for instructions which can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disks storage, optical disc storage (including compact disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, blu-ray disc, etc.), magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or capable of carrying or storing desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and any other medium that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory 1502 may be integrated with the processor 1501, or may exist independently, and be coupled to the processor 1501 through an interface circuit (not shown in FIG. 15) of the communication device 1500, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver 1503 is used for communication with other communication devices.
  • the communication apparatus 1500 is a terminal device, and the transceiver 1503 can be used to communicate with a network device or communicate with another terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus 1500 is a network device, and the transceiver 1503 may be used to communicate with a terminal device or communicate with another network device.
  • the transceiver 1503 may include a receiver and a transmitter (not shown separately in Figure 15). Among them, the receiver is used to realize the receiving function, and the transmitter is used to realize the sending function.
  • the transceiver 1503 may be integrated with the processor 1501, or may exist independently, and be coupled to the processor 1501 through an interface circuit (not shown in FIG. 15) of the communication device 1500, which is not made in this embodiment of the present application Specific restrictions.
  • the structure of the communication device 1500 shown in FIG. 15 does not constitute a limitation on the communication device, and an actual communication device may include more or less components than those shown in the figure, or combine some components, or Different component arrangements.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the The chip system implements the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the number of processors in the chip system may be one or more.
  • the processor can be implemented by hardware or by software.
  • the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor implemented by reading software codes stored in memory.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or may be provided separately from the processor, which is not limited in this application.
  • the memory can be a non-transitory processor, such as a read-only memory ROM, which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be provided on different chips.
  • the setting method of the processor is not particularly limited.
  • the chip system may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASCI), or a system on chip (SoC), It can also be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller).
  • controller unit, MCU it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication system.
  • the communication system includes the above-mentioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • processors in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), dedicated integrated Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASCI), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • enhanced SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Fetch memory
  • direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware (eg, circuits), firmware, or any other combination.
  • the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center by wire (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that contains one or more sets of available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
  • at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the embodiments of the present application. implementation constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Abstract

本申请提供一种通信方法及装置，能够解决资源冲突的问题，从而提高侧链通信的可靠性，可应用于NR系统中。该方法包括：接收来自第一终端设备的第一侧行控制信息，并发送第一消息。其中，第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数。第一消息承载在第一资源上。第一资源用于指示B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，B为正整数，且B小于或等于A。

Description

通信方法及装置 技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。
背景技术
侧行链路(sidelink)通信是指终端设备与终端设备间的通信，如第一终端设备通过侧行链路向第二终端设备发送侧行信息。具体地，若第一终端设备感知到第一资源空闲，则可以预留第一资源，并在该第一资源上向第二终端设备发送侧行业务。
然而，若第三终端设备预留的第二资源与第一资源冲突，如第一资源与第二资源交叠，且第二资源没有被第一终端设备感知到，则第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送的第一侧行信号，与第三终端设备在第二资源上发送的第二侧行信号相互干扰，可能导致第二终端设备无法成功接收第一侧行信号，从而导致数据丢失，影响侧链通信的可靠性。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置，能够解决资源冲突的问题，以避免信号干扰和数据丢失，从而提高侧链通信的可靠性。
为达到上述目的，本申请采用如下技术方案：
第一方面，提供一种通信方法。该通信方法包括：接收来自第一终端设备的第一侧行控制信息，并发送第一消息。其中，第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数。第一消息承载在第一资源上。第一资源用于指示B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，B为正整数，且B小于或等于A。
基于第一方面所述的方法可知，通过第一资源指示B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，以便相应地的设备，如第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，可根据第一消息承载的第一资源识别B个侧行资源中资源是否冲突，及时避免因资源冲突所导致的信号干扰和数据丢失，从而提高侧链通信的可靠性。
一种可能的设计方案中，冲突指示方式可以包括如下任一种：B个侧行资源中每个侧行资源是否冲突、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源不冲突、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源冲突、B个侧行资源是否有冲突。其中，一种冲突指示方式可以指示多种冲突状态，B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态可以属于多种冲突状态中的一种。其中，i为小于或等于A的正整数，B个侧行资源是否有冲突包括B个侧行资源有冲突和B个侧行资源不冲突。B个侧行资源有冲突可以为：B个侧行资源中有任一个资源冲突，B个侧行资源不冲突可以为B个侧行资源均不冲突。
应理解，由于不同的冲突指示方式可以指示不同数量的冲突状态，那么不同的冲突指示方式对用于指示的资源的需求量也可以不同。如此，终端设备或网络设备可以根据资源量，灵活选择匹配的冲突指示方式。比如，若用于冲突指示的资源充足，则可以选择每个侧行资源是否冲突的冲突指示方式，以指示准确每个侧行资源冲突与 否，从而能够准确地规避资源冲突。又比如，若用于冲突指示的资源有限，则可以选择第i个侧行资源冲突或第i个侧行资源不冲突的冲突指示方式，以实现既能够精确指示资源冲突，又能够节约资源开销，从而提高通信效率。再比如，若用于冲突指示的资源有限，则还可以选择B个侧行资源是否有冲突的冲突指示方式，以最大程度地节约资源开销，从而进一步提高通信效率。
一种可能的设计方案中，接收第一侧行控制信息包括：第二终端设备接收第一侧行控制信息。其中，第二终端设备可以被配置资源集合。资源集合可以包括用于指示冲突状态的多个资源。多个资源中的资源可以用于指示多种冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态。第一资源可以属于资源集合。
一种可能的设计方案中，第一资源可以包括如下一项或多项：第一频域资源、第一码域资源、或第一比特域资源。其中，第一码域资源可以用于生成第一消息。第一比特域资源可以为第一消息占用的比特数。第一频域资源可以包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。
应理解，由于第一资源可以是一种资源或多种资源的组合，以便终端或网络设备可以选择适合实际情况的一种或多种资源来灵活指示各种冲突状态。例如，若冲突状态的数量比较少，则可以选择任一种资源单独指示，以提高处理效率，减少资源占用；或者，也可以选择多种资源组合指示，以降低每种资源的需求量，从而节约资源。又例如，若冲突状态的数量比较多，则可以选择多种资源组合指示，以确保指示的准确性。
可选地，第一码域资源可以包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、或正交覆盖码，以便实际中可以选择适合实际情况的码域资源来生成第一消息。例如，若冲突状态的种类比较少，则可以选择资源数量相对较少的正交覆盖码进行指示，以节约资源。又例如，若冲突状态的种类比较多，则可以选择资源数量相对较多的循环移位码或根序列进行指示，以确保冲突指示的准确性。
可选地，第一方面所述的方法还可以包括：根据B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定第一资源。其中，由于多种冲突状态和资源集合之间预设有一一对应关系，以便终端或网络设备在确定冲突状态后，可根据该冲突状态的对应关系，快速确定对应的第一资源，从而提高处理效率。
进一步地，根据B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定第一资源，可以包括：根据第一侧行控制信息指示的第一业务标识，确定第一资源索引，并根据第一资源索引和B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定第一资源。其中，第一资源索引满足如下关系：R ID＝(X)modR RCI。其中，R ID为第一资源索引，X为第一业务标识，R RCI为资源集合中的资源数量。
可选地，第一资源索引与第一业务标识也可以满足如下关系：R ID＝(R′ ID+X)modR RCI其中，R ID为第一资源索引、R′ ID为第一冲突状态对应的索引、X为第一业务标识、R RCI为资源集合中的资源数量。
其中，根据资源索引的上述关系可知，由于资源索引是由终端设备的业务标识取模获得的，故使得不同终端设备可以对应不同资源索引。如此一来，使用不同的资源索引便可确定不同的资源，以实现对不同终端设备进行区分指示，进而避免误指示， 提高指示准确性。
一种可能的设计方案中，B个侧行资源可以包括：第一侧行资源和/或第二侧行资源。其中，第二侧行资源为第一侧行资源的周期预留资源。如此一来，不仅可以避免本周期内的资源冲突，还可以避免周期性的资源冲突。
可选地，第一侧行资源可以包括：承载第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。
第二方面，提供一种通信方法。该通信方法包括：发送第一侧行控制信息，并接收第一消息，以便根据第一资源确定B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态。其中，第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数。第一消息承载在第一资源上。B为正整数，且B小于或等于A。
一种可能的设计方案中，第二方面所述的方法还可以包括：根据一种冲突状态，更换B个侧行资源中冲突的侧行资源中的至少一个。
一种可能的设计方案中，冲突指示方式可以包括如下任一种：B个侧行资源中每个侧行资源是否冲突、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源不冲突、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源冲突、B个侧行资源是否有冲突。其中，一种冲突指示方式可以指示多种冲突状态，B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态可以属于多种冲突状态中的一种。其中，i为小于或等于A的正整数，B个侧行资源是否有冲突包括B个侧行资源有冲突和B个侧行资源不冲突。B个侧行资源有冲突可以为：B个侧行资源中有任一个资源冲突，B个侧行资源不冲突可以为B个侧行资源均不冲突。
一种可能的设计方案中，其中，第二终端设备可以用于接收第一侧行控制信息。第二终端设备可以被配置资源集合。资源集合可以包括用于指示冲突状态的多个资源。多个资源中的资源可以用于指示多种冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态。第一资源可以属于资源集合。
一种可能的设计方案中，第一资源可以包括如下一项或多项：第一频域资源、第一时域资源、第一码域资源、或第一比特域资源。其中，第一码域资源可以用于生成第一消息。第一比特域资源可以为第一消息占用的比特数。第一频域资源可以包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。
可选地，第一码域资源可以包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、或正交覆盖码。
一种可能的设计方案中，B个侧行资源可以包括：第一侧行资源和/或第二侧行资源。其中，第二侧行资源为第一侧行资源的周期预留资源。
可选地，第一侧行资源可以包括：承载第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。
此外，第二方面所述的方法的相关技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第三方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置包括：接收模块和发送模块。其中，接收模块，用于接收来自第一终端设备的第一侧行控制信息。发送模块，用于发送第一消息。其中，第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数。第一消息承载在第一资源上。第一资源用于指示B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，B为正 整数，且B小于或等于A。
一种可能的设计方案中，冲突指示方式可以包括如下任一种：B个侧行资源中每个侧行资源是否冲突、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源不冲突、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源冲突、B个侧行资源是否有冲突。其中，一种冲突指示方式可以指示多种冲突状态，B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态可以属于多种冲突状态中的一种。其中，i为小于或等于A的正整数，B个侧行资源是否有冲突包括B个侧行资源有冲突和B个侧行资源不冲突。B个侧行资源有冲突可以为：B个侧行资源中有任一个资源冲突，B个侧行资源不冲突可以为B个侧行资源均不冲突。
一种可能的设计方案中，接收模块，可以用于第二终端设备接收第一侧行控制信息。其中，第二终端设备可以被配置资源集合。资源集合可以包括用于指示冲突状态的多个资源。多个资源中的资源可以用于指示多种冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态。第一资源可以属于资源集合。
一种可能的设计方案中，第一资源可以包括如下一项或多项：第一频域资源、第一时域资源、第一码域资源、或第一比特域资源。其中，第一码域资源可以用于生成第一消息。第一比特域资源可以为第一消息占用的比特数。第一频域资源可以包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。
可选地，第一码域资源可以包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、或正交覆盖码。
可选地，第三方面所述的装置还可以包括：处理模块。其中，处理模块，用于根据B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定第一资源。
进一步地，处理模块，用于根据第一侧行控制信息指示的第一业务标识，确定第一资源索引，并根据第一资源索引和B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定第一资源。其中，第一资源索引满足如下关系：R ID＝(X)modR RCI。其中，R ID为第一资源索引，X为第一业务标识，R RCI为资源集合中的资源数量。
可选地，第一资源索引与第一业务标识也可以满足如下关系：R ID＝(R′ ID+X)modR RCI其中，R ID为第一资源索引、R′ ID为第一冲突状态对应的索引、X为第一业务标识、R RCI为资源集合中的资源数量。
一种可能的设计方案中，B个侧行资源可以包括：第一侧行资源和/或第二侧行资源。其中，第二侧行资源为第一侧行资源的周期预留资源。
可选地，第一侧行资源可以包括：承载第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。
可选地，接收模块和发送模块可以集成为一个模块，如收发模块。其中，收发模块用于实现第三方面所述的装置的发送功能和接收功能。
可选地，第三方面所述的装置还可以包括存储模块，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块执行该程序或指令时，使得该装置可以执行第一方面所述的方法。
需要说明的是，第三方面所述的装置可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其它部件或组件，还可以是包含终端设备或网络设备的装置，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，第三方面所述的装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的方法的技术效 果，此处不再赘述。
第四方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置包括：收发模块和处理模块。其中，收发模块，用于发送第一侧行控制信息，并接收第一消息，其中，第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数。第一消息承载在第一资源上。处理模块，用于根据第一资源确定B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态。其中，B为正整数，且B小于或等于A。
一种可能的设计方案中，处理模块，还用于根据B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，更换B个侧行资源中冲突的侧行资源中的至少一种。
一种可能的设计方案中，冲突指示方式可以包括如下任一种：B个侧行资源中每个侧行资源是否冲突、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源不冲突、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源冲突、B个侧行资源是否有冲突。其中，一种冲突指示方式可以指示多种冲突状态，B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态可以属于多种冲突状态中的一种。其中，i为小于或等于A的正整数，B个侧行资源是否有冲突包括B个侧行资源有冲突和B个侧行资源不冲突。B个侧行资源有冲突可以为：B个侧行资源中有任一个资源冲突，B个侧行资源不冲突可以为B个侧行资源均不冲突。
一种可能的设计方案中，其中，第二终端设备用于接收第一侧行控制信息。第二终端设备可以被配置资源集合。资源集合可以包括用于指示冲突状态的多个资源。多个资源中的资源可以用于指示多种冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态。第一资源可以属于资源集合。
一种可能的设计方案中，第一资源可以包括如下一项或多项：第一频域资源、第一时域资源、第一码域资源、或第一比特域资源。其中，第一码域资源可以用于生成第一消息。第一比特域资源可以为第一消息占用的比特数。第一频域资源可以包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。
可选地，第一码域资源可以包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、或正交覆盖码。
一种可能的设计方案中，B个侧行资源可以包括：第一侧行资源和/或第二侧行资源。其中，第二侧行资源为第一侧行资源的周期预留资源。
可选地，第一侧行资源可以包括：承载第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。
可选地，收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块。其中，接收模块用于实现第四方面所述的装置的接收功能。发送模块用于实现第四方面所述的装置的发送功能。
可选地，第四方面所述的装置还可以包括存储模块，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块执行该程序或指令时，使得该通信装置可以执行第二方面所述的方法。
需要说明的是，第四方面所述的通信装置可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其它部件或组件，还可以是包含终端设备或网络设备的装置，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，第四方面所述的装置的技术效果可以参考第二方面所述的方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第五方面，提供一种通信装置。该装置包括：处理器，处理器与存储器耦合。处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得该装置执行如第一方面所述的方法，或者执行如第二方面所述的方法。
可选地，第五方面所述的装置还可以包括：接收器和发送器。其中，接收器用于实现该装置的接收功能，发送器用于实现该装置的发送功能。该发送器和接收器也可以集成为一个器件，如收发器。其中，收发器则用于实现该装置的发送功能和接收功能。
需要说明的是，第五方面所述的装置可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，还可以是包含终端设备或网络设备的装置，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，第五方面所述的装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第六方面，提供了一种通信装置。该装置包括：处理器和存储器。存储器用于存储计算机程序，当处理器执行该计算机程序时，以使该装置执行如第一方面所述的方法，或者执行如第二方面所述的方法。
可选地，第六方面所述的装置还可以包括：接收器和发送器。其中，接收器用于实现该装置的接收功能，发送器用于该装置的发送功能。可选地，该发送器和接收器也可以集成为一个器件，如收发器。其中，收发器则用于实现该装置的发送功能和接收功能。
本申请中，第六方面所述的装置可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，还可以是包含终端设备或网络设备的装置，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，第六方面所述的装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第七方面，提供了一种通信装置。该装置包括：处理器和接口电路。其中，接口电路，用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器；处理器用于运行该代码指令以执行如第一方面所述的方法，或者执行如第二方面所述的方法。
可选地，第七方面所述的装置还可以包括：接收器和发送器。其中，接收器用于实现该装置的接收功能，发送器用于实现该装置的发送功能。可选地，该发送器和接收器也可以集成为一个器件，如收发器。其中，收发器则用于实现该装置的发送功能和接收功能。
可选地，第七方面所述的装置还可以包括存储器，该存储器存储有程序或指令。当第七方面所述的处理器执行该程序或指令时，使得该装置可以执行如第一方面所述的方法，或者执行如第二方面所述的方法。
需要说明的是，第七方面所述的装置可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，还可以是包含终端设备或网络设备的装置，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，第七方面所述的装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第八方面，提供了一种通信装置。该装置包括处理器和收发器，其中，收发器可以为收发电路或接口电路，该收发器用于该装置和其他装置之间进行信息交互，该处理器执行程序指令，用以执行如第一方面所述的方法，或者执行如第二方面所述的方法。
可选地，第八方面所述的装置还可以包括存储器，该存储器存储有程序或指令。当第八方面所述的处理器执行该程序或指令时，使得该装置可以执行如第一方面所述的方法，或者执行如第二方面所述的方法。
需要说明的是，第八方面所述的装置可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，还可以是包含终端设备或网络设备的装置，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，第八方面所述的装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第九方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质。该计算机可读存储介质可以包括：计算机程序或指令，当计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如第一方面或第二方面所述的方法。
第十方面，提供一种计算机程序产品。该计算机程序产品可以包括：计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如第一方面或第二方面所述的方法。
第十一方面，提供一种通信系统。该通信系统可以包括如第三方面所述的装置和/或如第四方面所述的装置。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例中时频资源的位置示例图一；
图2为本申请实施例中隐藏节点的场景示意图一；
图3为本申请实施例中隐藏节点的场景示意图二；
图4为本申请实施例中时频资源的位置示例图二；
图5为本申请实施例提供的通信系统的架构示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的通信方法中执行取模运算的场景示意图一；
图8为本申请实施例提供的通信方法中执行取模运算的场景示意图二；
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信方法中执行取模运算的场景示意图三；
图10为本申请实施例提供的通信方法中执行取模运算的场景示意图四；
图11为本申请实施例提供的通信方法中执行取模运算的场景示意图五；
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信方法中执行取模运算的场景示意图六；
图13为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图一；
图14为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图二；
图15为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图三。
具体实施方式
首先介绍本申请实施例所涉及的技术术语。
1、资源(resource)
资源可以用于承载相应地消息，如侧行控制信息(sidelink control information，SCI)，可以包括：码域资源、比特域资源、时域资源、频域资源。
其中，码域资源可以用于生成消息，也可以说码域资源承载该消息或码域资源与该消息关联，码域资源可包括如下一项或多项：循环移位码(cyclic shift code)、根序列(root sequence)、基序列(base sequence)、或正交覆盖码(orthogonal cover code)。码域资源与生成的消息之间可以满足如下式(1)的关系：
x(n)＝f CS(n)  (1)
在式(1)中，n可以为(0,1,…,Nc-1)，Nc为码序列长度，x(n)为消息，f cs()为码域资源对应的编码函数。
其中，比特域资源可以为消息占用的比特数，可以有不同的取值。
若用比特域资源承载消息，则比特域资源与消息之间可以满足如下式(2)的关系：
x(n)＝y(m)  (2)
在式(2)中，x(n)为消息，y(m)为比特域资源。换言之，比特域资源即是消息的内容。比特码的不同取值可以代表不同的消息内容。
若用码域资源和比特域资源共同承载消息，则比特域资源与消息之间可以满足如下式(3)的关系：
x(n)＝f CS(y(m))(3)
在式(3)中，x(n)为消息，y(m)为比特域资源，f cs()为码域资源对应的编码函数。比特码的不同取值和编码函数组合可以代表不同的消息内容。
总而言之，码域资源和比特域资源可以独立地或者组合地承载的各种消息内容。
其中，时域资源可以是如下一种或多种：符号、时隙(slot)、迷你时隙(mini-slot)、子帧(subframe)、无线帧等(radio frame)。频域资源可以是如下一种或多种：LsubCh个连续的子信道(sub-channel)、资源池(resource pool)、载波(carrier)、子载波(subcarrier)、资源块(resource blocks，RB)、资源粒子(resource element，RE)、部分带宽(bandwidth part，BWP)等。其中，L为正整数。频域资源可以包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。其中，资源块可以是物理资源块(physcial resource blocks，PRB)。
实际应用中，一个时频资源上可以承载物理侧行链路控制信道(physcial sidelink control channel，PSCCH)、物理侧行链路共享信道(physcial sidelink share channel，PSSCH)、或物理侧行链路反馈信道(physcial sidelink feedback channel，PSFCH)，以及还可以承载解调参考信号(demodulatin reference signal，DMRS)等，对此不予限定。
2、重传预留资源
重传预留资源可以是终端设备在一个SCI中为执行数据重传而预留的时频资源。其中，重传预留资源可以是链式预留的，可以是1个或多个，但并不作为限定。
具体的，SCI可以通过频域资源配置(Frequency resource assignment)、时域资源配置(Time resource assignment)和资源预留周期(resource reservation period)三个字段指示资源预留，该预留资源用于重传和/或周期性传输。其中，频域资源配置 包括配置的预留资源的时域信息，时域资源配置包括配置的预留资源的频域和子信道信息。其中，频域资源配置和时域资源配置包括sl-MaxNumPerReserve参数，用于表示预留资源的最大数目，预留资源的数目大于或等于1，个资源为预留给重传的资源。其中，第一个预留资源为当前发送SCI所在的资源，其余的sl-MaxNumPerReserve-1个预留资源为预留给重传的资源。其中，SCI还可以链式预留，即一个SCI中指示sl-MaxNumPerReserve个资源，第一个为当前发送SCI所在的资源，其余的sl-MaxNumPerReserve-1个预留资源为预留给重传的资源。其中，根据资源预留周期字段，终端设备还可以周期性地预留sl-MaxNumPerReserve个资源。
例如，图1示出3个时频资源，包括侧行资源R1、侧行资源R2和侧行资源R3。其中，侧行资源R1可以为{a,(b,b+5)}、侧行资源R2可以为{a+2,(b+2,b+7)}侧行资源R3可以为{a+4,(b+3,b+8)}。其中，a为时频资源的时隙编号，b为时频资源的子信道编号，a和b均为整数，且a和b可以表示侧行资源的时频位置。例如，以{a,(b,b+5)}为例，{a,(b,b+5)}可以表示：侧行资源R1的时域位置位于时隙a，且侧行资源R1的频域位置位于子信道b到b+5。进一步地，若终端设备在侧行资源R1上发送第一侧行信息，则终端设备可以为第一侧行信息预留侧行资源R2和/或侧行资源R3，以便终端设备在侧行资源R2和/或侧行资源R3上重传第一侧行信息。
3、周期预留资源
周期预留资源可以是终端设备为周期业务预留的时频资源。其中，周期资源是可以链式预留的。
例如，图1还示出侧行资源R4-R6。其中，侧行资源R4可为{a+6,(b,b+5)}、侧行资源R5可为{a+8,(b+2,b+7)}、以及侧行资源R6可为{a+10,(b+3,b+8)}。若终端设备在侧行资源R1上发送第一业务的侧行信息，且第一业务的周期为6个时隙，则终端设备可以为侧行资源R1预留侧行资源R4、为侧行资源R2预留侧行资源R5、以及为侧行资源R3预留侧行资源R6。如此，终端设备可以在侧行资源R4上周期性发送第一业务的侧行信息，以及在侧行资源R5-R6上周期性发送第一业务的重传信息。
4、半双工(half duplexing)模式
半双工模式是指终端设备的发送动作和接收动作不能同时执行，即在同一个时隙内，终端设备要么执行发送动作，要么执行接收动作。
5、隐藏节点
隐藏节点是指终端设备感知不到的设备。
例如，图2示出2个用户设备(user equipment，终端设备)，包括终端设备A、终端设备B和终端设备C。其中，终端设备A的感知范围为图2中虚线Cell 1所示的区域，终端设备B的感知范围为图2中虚线Cell 2所示的区域。由于终端设备A和终端设备B互相位于对方的感知范围外，故终端设备A和终端设备B互为对方的隐藏节点。更具体地来说，若终端设备A与终端设备C(终端设备C位于终端设备A和终端设备B感知范围内)建立侧行链路L 1，则终端设备B可以是该侧行链路L 1的隐藏节点；反之，若终端设备B与终端设备C建立侧行链路L 2，则终端设备A可以是该侧行链路L 2的隐藏节点。
例如，图3示出2个终端设备，包括终端设备A和终端设备B。其中，终端设备A的感知范围为图3中虚线Cell 1所示的区域，终端设备B的感知范围为图3中虚线Cell 2所示的区域。由于终端设备B位于终端设备A感知范围内，终端设备A位于终端设备B感知范围外，则终端设备A能够感知到终端设备B，而终端设备B无法感知到终端设备A，故认为终端设备A是终端设备B的隐藏节点，但终端设备B不是终端设备A隐藏节点。更具体地来说，若终端设备A与终端设备C建立侧行链路L1，则终端设备B可以是该侧行链路L1的隐藏节点；反之，若终端设备B与终端设备C建立侧行链路L2，则终端设备A便不是该侧行链路L2的隐藏节点。
6、资源冲突
其中，冲突可以是部分重叠(overlapping)、碰撞(collision)、confit，本申请对此不作限制。资源冲突是指时频资源冲突，即时频资源的位置重合或部分重合，类型可以包括：发送冲突和收发冲突。下面分别予以介绍。
a、发送冲突
发送冲突是指用于发送侧链信息的时频资源冲突。具体来说，若多个终端设备在时频位置重合或部分重合的时频资源上，向其他的终端设备发送侧链信息，则该时频资源便存在发送冲突，并产生信号干扰。如此，终端设备的数据接收成功率会因信号干扰而下降，从而影响通信可靠性。
例如，请参阅图2-图4，图4示出4个时频资源，包括侧行资源R7、侧行资源R8、侧行资源R9和侧行资源R10。其中，侧行资源R7可以为{a,(b+1,b+6)}、侧行资源R6可以为{a,(b+4,b+9)}、侧行资源R9可以为{a,(b+10,b+15)}、以及侧行资源R10可以为{a+2,(b+1,b+6)}。
其中，由于侧行资源R7和侧行资源R8的时频位置部分重合(图4中的填充区域)，故侧行资源R7和侧行资源R8存在发送冲突。换言之，若终端设备A在侧行资源R7上向终端设备C发送第一侧行信息，而终端设备B又在侧行资源R8上向终端设备C发送第二侧行信息，则终端设备C可能会因第一侧行信息和第二侧行信息的信号存在干扰，而无法成功接收第一侧行信息和第二侧行信息，从而导致数据丢失。或者，若终端设备A在侧行资源R7上向终端设备C发送第一侧行信息，而终端设备B又在侧行资源R8上向终端设备D(图中未示出)发送第二侧行信息，则终端设备C和终端设备D也可能会因第一侧行信息和第二侧行信息的信号存在干扰，而无法成功接收第一侧行信息和第二侧行信息，从而导致数据丢失。
此外，虽然侧行资源R7、侧行资源R8和侧行资源R9的时域位置重合，但由于侧行资源R7与侧行资源R8，以及侧行资源R8与侧行资源R9频域位置不重合，因此侧行资源R7与侧行资源R9，以及侧行资源R8与侧行资源R9不存在发送冲突。换言之，若终端设备A在侧行资源R7或侧行资源R8上向终端设备C发送第一侧行信息，而终端设备B在侧行资源R9上向终端设备C发送第二侧行信息，则终端设备C仍可以同时接收第一侧行信息和第二侧行信息。
再者，虽然侧行资源R7与侧行资源R10的频域位置重合，但由于侧行资源R7与侧行资源R10的时域位置不重合，因此侧行资源R7与侧行资源R10不存在发送冲突。比如，若终端设备A在侧行资源R7上向终端设备C发送第一侧行信息，而终端 设备B在侧行资源R10上向终端设备C发送第二侧行信息，则终端设备C可以先后接收第一侧行信息和第二侧行信息。
换句话说，只有在时频位置均重合或部分重合时，时频资源才存在发送冲突，否则，不存在发送冲突。
b、收发冲突
收发冲突是指用于发送侧链信息的时频资源与用于接收侧链信息的时频资源冲突。具体来说，因半双工模式，若终端设备在第一时频资源发送侧行信息，则不能在与第一时频资源的时域位置重合或部分重合的第二时频资源上，接收来自其它终端设备的侧链信息，从而导致数据丢失，影响通信可靠性。
例如，请继续参阅图2和图3，其中，由于侧行资源R7、侧行资源R8和侧行资源R9的时域位置重合(时隙a)，故侧行资源R7、侧行资源R8和侧行资源R9存在收发冲突。比如，若终端设备C在侧行资源R7或侧行资源R8向终端设备A发送第一侧行信息，则终端设备C会因半双工模式而无法在侧行资源R9上接收来自终端设备B的第二侧行信息，从而导致数据丢失。
此外，虽然侧行资源R7与侧行资源R10的频域位置重合，但由于侧行资源R7与侧行资源R10的时域位置不重合，因此侧行资源R7与侧行资源R10也不存在收发冲突。比如，终端设备C在侧行资源R7向终端设备A发送第一侧行信息，则终端设备C也可以在侧行资源R10上接收来自终端设备B的第二侧行信息。
换句话说，只有在时域位置重合或部分重合时，时频资源才存在收发冲突，否则，不存在收发冲突。
7、资源冲突指示
a、碰撞前指示
以图2和图3为例，对于碰撞前指示，终端设备C在确定SCI1所指示的预留资源和SCI2所指示的预留资源发生冲突时，在冲突位置之前向终端设备A或终端设备B发送第一消息，以指示SCI1所指示的预留资源和SCI2所指示的预留资源发生冲突。例如，图1中侧行资源R1为SCI所指示的资源，且为承载SCI的资源，侧行资源R2和R3为SCI所指示的预留资源。若终端设备C确定图1中侧行资源R2冲突，则可以在侧行资源R2的时域位置之前发送第一消息，以指示侧行资源R2冲突。
可选的，SCI1所指示的预留资源和SCI2所指示的预留资源中，有多个预留资源发生冲突时，终端设备C可以在第一个预留资源冲突位置之前向终端设备A或终端设备B发送第一消息，以指示多个预留资源冲突。例如，图1中侧行资源R1为SCI所指示的资源，且为承载SCI的资源，侧行资源R2和R3为SCI所指示的预留资源。若终端设备C确定图1中侧行资源R2和R3冲突，则可以在侧行资源R2的时域位置之前发送第一消息，以指示侧行资源R2和R3冲突。
可选的，SCI1所指示的预留资源和SCI2所指示的预留资源中，有多个预留资源发生冲突时，终端设备C可以在每一个冲突位置之前向终端设备A或终端设备B发送每一个预留资源对应的第一消息，以依次指示每一个预留资源冲突。例如，图1中侧行资源R1为SCI所指示的资源，且为承载SCI的资源，侧行资源R2和R3为 SCI所指示的预留资源。若终端设备C确定图1中侧行资源R2和R3冲突，则可以在侧行资源R2的时域位置之前发送一次第一消息，以指示侧行资源R2冲突，并在侧行资源R3的时域位置之前再发送一次第一消息，以指示侧行资源R3冲突。
b、碰撞后指示
以图2和图3为例，终端设备C在确定承载SCI1的资源与承载SCI2的资源发生冲突时，在冲突位置之后向终端设备A或终端设备B发送第一消息,以指示SCI1指示的资源与SCI2指示的资源发生冲突。例如，图1中侧行资源R1为承载SCI的资源，侧行资源R2为SCI所指示的预留资源。若终端设备C确定图1中侧行资源R1和R2冲突，则可以在侧行资源R1的时域位置之后发送第一消息，以指示侧行资源R1和R2冲突。
可选的，若SCI1所指示的资源和SCI2所指示的资源中，有多个资源发生冲突时，则终端设备C可以在第一个或者最后一个冲突位置之后向终端设备A或终端设备B发送一次第一消息，以指示多个资源发生冲突。例如，图1中侧行资源R1为SCI所指示的资源，且为承载SCI的资源，侧行资源R2和R3为SCI所指示的预留资源。若终端设备C确定图1中侧行资源R1-R3冲突，则可以在侧行资源R1、R2或R3的时域位置之后发送一次第一消息，以指示侧行资源R1-R3的冲突。
可选的，若SCI1所指示的资源和SCI2所指示的资源中，有多个资源发生冲突时，则终端设备C可以在第一个或者最后一个冲突位置之后向终端设备A或终端设备B发送多次第一消息，每个第一消息可以指示对应的一个资源冲突。例如，图1中侧行资源R1为SCI所指示的资源，且为承载SCI的资源，侧行资源R2和R3为SCI所指示的预留资源。若终端设备C确定图1中侧行资源R1-R2冲突，则可以在侧行资源R1或R2时域位置之后发送两次第一消息，一次指示侧行资源R1冲突，而另一次指示侧行资源R2冲突。
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如无线保真(wireless fidelity，WiFi)系统，车到任意物体(vehicle to everything，V2X)通信系统、设备间(device-todevie，D2D)通信系统、车联网通信系统、第4代(4th generation，4G)移动通信系统，如长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th generation，5G)移动通信系统，如新空口(new radio，NR)系统，以及未来的通信系统，如第六代(6th generation，6G)移动通信系统等。
本申请将围绕可包括多个设备、组件、模块等的系统来呈现各个方面、实施例或特征。应当理解和明白的是，各个系统可以包括另外的设备、组件、模块等，并且/或者可以并不包括结合附图讨论的所有设备、组件、模块等。此外，还可以使用这些方案的组合。
另外，在本申请实施例中，“示例地”、“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言，使用示例的一词旨在以具体方式呈现概念。
本申请实施例中，“信息(information)”，“信号(signal)”，“消息 (message)”，“信道(channel)”、“信令(singaling)”有时可以混用，应当指出的是，在不强调其区别时，其所要表达的含义是一致的。“的(of)”，“相应的(corresponding，relevant)”和“对应的(corresponding)”有时可以混用，应当指出的是，在不强调其区别时，其所要表达的含义是一致的。
本申请实施例中，有时候下标如W 1可能会笔误为非下标的形式如W1，在不强调其区别时，其所要表达的含义是一致的。
本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题，同样适用。
为便于理解本申请实施例，首先以图5中示出的通信系统为例详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。示例性地，图5为本申请实施例提供的通信方法所适用的一种通信系统的架构示意图。
如图5所示，该通信系统包括多个终端设备，如第一终端设备、第二终端设备、第三终端设备和第四终端设备。
上述终端设备为接入上述通信系统，且具有无线收发功能的终端或可设置于该终端的芯片或芯片系统。该终端设备也可以称为用户装置、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、车载终端、具有终端功能的RSU等。本申请的终端设备还可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元，车辆通过内置的所述车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元可以实施本申请提供的通信方法。其中，上述终端设备可以包括：第一终端设备、第二终端设备、第三终端设备以及第四终端设备。
其中，第一终端设备和第三终端设备可以是发送终端设备，第二终端设备可以是辅助终端设备，第四终端设备可以是接收终端设备。
具体地，第二终端设备可以用于监听第一终端设备的PSCCH1和PSSCH1，以及监听第三终端设备的PSCCH2和PSSCH2。其中，PSCCH1上承载SCI1，以及PSCCH2上承载SCI2。第二终端设备可以是第三方终端设备，也可以是发送终端设备中的一个终端设备(如第二终端设备或第三终端设备)，也可以是接收终端设备中的一个终端设备(如第四终端设备)。另外，第二终端设备可以是一个也可以是多个。第二终端设备接收并解码来自第二终端设备和第三终端设备的SCI，如果预留的资源发生冲突(全部或部分冲突)，第二终端设备发送第一消息告知第二终端设备和第三终端设备中的某一个终端设备。具体地，分为以下两种情况：第二终端设备在确 定SCI1所指示的预留资源和SCI2所指示的预留资源发生冲突时，向第一终端设备或第三终端设备发送第一消息；第二终端设备在确定承载SCI1的资源和承载SCI2的资源发生冲突时，向第一终端设备或第三终端设备发送第一消息。
第一终端设备/第三终端设备，用于监听第二终端设备的第一消息，第一终端设备/第三终端设备的数量不限于只有2个，实际上多个第一终端设备/第三终端设备都有可能预留到同一个资源上，或者多个第一终端设备/第三终端设备的SCI所在的资源发生冲突。另外，如果第二终端设备与第三终端设备为同一个设备，则可以发第一消息指示第一终端设备更换传输资源，也可以第二终端设备更换传输资源。
第四终端设备可以为一个或多个，用于接收来自第一终端设备的PSCCH1和PSSCH1，以及来自第三终端设备的PSCCH2和PSSCH2。本申请的场景也不限于单播，即第一终端设备/第三终端设备和第四终端设备之间的链路可以是单播、组播、广播。如果第二终端设备与第四终端设备为同一个设备，则可以指示第二终端设备的发射终端设备，如第一终端设备更换传输资源，也可以指示干扰到第二终端设备发射的终端设备，如第三终端设备更换传输资源。
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
可选地，通信系统还可以包括网络设备。
其中，上述网络设备为位于上述通信系统的网络侧，且具有无线收发功能的设备或可设置于该设备的芯片或芯片系统。该网络设备包括但不限于：无线保真(wireless fidelity，WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point，AP)，如家庭网关、路由器、服务器、交换机、网桥等，演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)、节点B(Node B，NB)、基站控制器(base station controller，BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，home evolved NodeB，或home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)，无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission and reception point，TRP或者transmission point，TP)等，还可以为5G，如，新空口(new radio，NR)系统中的gNB，或，传输点(TRP或TP)，5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板，或者，还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点，如基带单元(BBU)，或，分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)、具有基站功能的路边单元(road side unit，RSU)等。
本申请实施例提供的通信方法可以适用于上述多个终端设备，或者多个终端设备与网络设备之间的通信。
具体而言，第一种场景下，若第一终端设备和第三终端设备互为对方的隐藏节点，则第二终端设备或网络设备可作为辅助设备，用于执行该通信方法，以感知第一终端设备使用的侧行资源与第三终端设备使用的侧行资源是否冲突。第二种场景下，若第一终端设备为第三终端设备的隐藏节点，而第三终端设备能够感知到第一终端设备，则第三终端设备可作为辅助设备，用于执行该通信方法，以感知第三终端设备使用的侧行资源与第一终端设备使用的侧行资源是否冲突。换言之，第二种场景下，第二终端设备和第三终端设备可以是同一个设备。
需要说明的是，上述辅助设备执行本申请实施例提供的通信方法的具体实现可以参考下述方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
应当指出的是，本申请实施例中的方案还可以应用于其它通信系统中，相应的名称也可以用其它通信系统中的对应功能的名称进行替代。此外，图5仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图，该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备，和/或，其它终端设备，图5中未予以画出。
下面将结合图6-图12对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行具体阐述。
示例性地，图6为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图。该通信方法可以适用于上述第一种场景或者第二种场景。为便于说明，下面以上述第一种场景为例进行介绍，但并不作为限定。
如图6所示，该通信方法包括如下步骤：
S601，第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一侧行控制信息，第二终端设备接收来自第一终端设备的第一侧行控制信息。
示例性地，第一侧行控制信息可以用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数，可是以如下一种或多种：SCI消息、媒体存取控制位址控制信元(media access control address control element，MAC CE)消息、无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)消息、或PC5-RRC消息。
其中，第一侧行控制信息可以包括：第一时域资源分配信息、第一频域资源分配信息、第一时频资源预留周期信息。A个侧行资源可以是第一终端设备用于侧行链路传输的时频资源，包括：第一侧行资源和第二侧行资源。
第一时域资源分配信息可以用于指示：第一侧行资源的时域位置，如第一侧行资源所在的时隙。第一侧行资源可以包括：承载第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。承载第一侧行控制信息的资源包括第一侧行控制信息及第一侧行控制信息调度的数据所占用的资源，即第一PSCCH/PSSCH所占用的资源。其中，承载第一侧行控制信息的资源还可以称为：承载第一侧行控制信息所调度的数据的资源、承载第一PSCCH的资源、承载第一PSSCH的资源、承载第一PSCCH/PSSCH的资源。重预留资源可以是1个或2个，并位于时域上连续地多个时间段中的一个第一时间段。其中，多个时间段中任意两个时间段的长度相同，第一时间段可以是承载第一侧行控制信息的资源所在的时间段，如传输块(transport block，TB)，或者也可以是该时间段之后的时间段，对此不予限定。例如图1所示，承载第一侧行控制信息的资源可以是侧行资源R1，第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源可以是侧行资源R2和R3，换言之，第一侧行控制信息可以包括侧行资源R1-R3。
第一频域资源分配信息可以用于指示：第一侧行资源的频域位置，如第一侧行资源占用的子信道的起始位置和长度的信息。第一时频资源预留周期信息可以用于指示第一侧行控制信息的周期，该周期可以是[1:99]、100、200、300、400、500、600、700、800、900、1000毫秒等。换言之，第一侧行控制信息可通过第一时频资源分配信息和第一时频资源分配信息，指示第一侧行资源的位置，并通过第一侧行资源的位置与第一时频资源预留周期信息，指示第二侧行资源的位置。也就是说，第二侧行资源是第一侧行资源周期预留资源，如可以是承载第一侧行控制信息的资源的周期预留资源和/或第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源的周期预留资源，并位于第一周期之后的第a个周期，a为正整数。例如图1所示，若第二侧行资源为侧行资源R4，则 第一侧行控制信息可以通过侧行资源R1为{a,(b,b+5)}以及周期为6个时隙，指示侧行资源R4为{a+6,(b,b+5)}。如此，第二终端设备便可以根据第一侧行控制信息的指示，确定A个侧行资源的位置。
可选地，第一侧行控制信息还可以包括：第一业务标识以及第一业务的优先级信息。
其中，第一业务标识可以用于指示第一业务，不同的业务标识可以通过不同侧行控制信息指示，而不同的业务标识可以指示不同的业务。具体地，第一业务标识可以是如下一项或多项：源标识(source ID)、目的地标识(destination ID)、组员标识(member ID)、优先级等。具体的，可以为第一控制信息中指示的source ID、destination ID、member ID、优先级等。第一业务的优先级信息可以用于指示第一业务的优先级，且不同也业务可以具有不同的优先级。
S602，第二终端设备发送第一消息，第一终端设备接收第一消息。
示例性地，第一消息可以承载在第一资源上，可以是资源碰撞指示(resource collision indication，RCI)消息，也可以称为资源碰撞指示，资源重合指示等，本申请对此不作限制。资源冲突指示可以在已经冲突的资源之后发送，为了便于描述在本专利中记为post-RCI，也可以称为碰后指示、冲突后指示、重合后指示，本申请对此不作限制。资源冲突指示可以在可能会冲突的资源之前发送，为了便于描述在本专利中记为pre-RCI，也可以称为碰前指示、冲突前指示、重合前指示，本申请对此不作限制。
其中，B个侧行资源可以是A个侧行资源中的至少一部分资源，包括：上述第一侧行资源和/或上述第二侧行资源。换句话说，第二终端设备可以根据实际需求，在A个侧行资源中选择性地确定资源冲突。例如，第二终端设备可以确定第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源的一种冲突状态，如确定图1中侧行资源R2和/或侧行资源R3的一种冲突状态，以避免在本周期内发生资源冲突。又例如，第二终端设备可以确定承载第一侧行控制信息的资源或第二侧行资源的一种冲突状态，如确定图1中侧行资源R1或侧行资源R4的一种冲突状态，以避免发生周期间的资源冲突。再例如，第二终端设备也可以确定第一侧行资源和第二侧行资源的一种冲突状态，如确定如图1中侧行资源R1-R3的一种冲突状态、侧行资源R2-R4的一种冲突状态、或者侧行资源R1-R4的一种冲突状态，以同时避免本周期和周期间的资源冲突。
进一步地，B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态可以采用不同冲突指示方式进行指示。其中，冲突指示方式可以为如下任一种：B个侧行资源中每个侧行资源是否冲突(方式1)、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源不冲突(方式2)、B个侧行资源中第i个侧行资源冲突(方式3)、B个侧行资源是否有冲突(方式4)。i可以为小于或等于B的正整数，B个侧行资源是否有冲突为：B个侧行资源中有任一个侧行资源冲突，或者，B个侧行资源均不冲突。其中，上述任一种冲突指示方式均可以指示B个侧行资源的多种冲突状态，且B个侧行资源的上述一种冲突状态属于该多种冲突状态中的一种。
可以看出，在上述方式1-方式4中，方式1-方式3是以单个侧行资源为粒度进行指示，而方式4是以B个侧行资源整体为粒度进行指示。下面具体说明。
具体而言，在方式1中：由于每个侧行资源都有冲突和不冲突两种状态，那么B个侧行资源的冲突状态一共可以有2 B种，因此方式1可以指示2 B种冲突状态。换言之，方式1可认为是肯定应答(acknowledgement，ACK)-否定应答(negative acknowledgement，NACK)。其中，有资源冲突的状态可以认为是ACK，而B个侧行资源均不冲突的状态可认为是NACK。
在方式2中：指示第i个侧行资源不冲突可以是指：B个侧行资源中只要有不冲突就会指示，并且具体指示哪一个资源不冲突。这种情况下，方式2不指示的冲突状态只有B个侧行资源都冲突这一种，因此方式2可以指示2 B-1种冲突状态。此外，由于方式2指示的每种冲突状态都有侧行资源不冲突，因此方式2可认为是只肯定应答(NACK only)。
在方式3中：指示第i个侧行资源冲突可以是指：B个侧行资源中只要有冲突就会指示，并且具体指示哪一个资源冲突。这种情况下，方式3不指示的冲突状态只有B个侧行资源都不冲突这一种，因此方式3也可以指示2 B-1种冲突状态。此外，由于方式3指示的每种冲突状态都有侧行资源冲突，因此方式3可认为是只否定应答(ACK only)。
在方式4中：B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突可以包括：B个侧行资源有冲突和B个侧行资源不冲突两种。其中，B个侧行资源有冲突可以为：B个侧行资源中有任一个侧行资源冲突，而B个侧行资源不冲突可以为：B个侧行资源均不冲突，换言之，方式4一共可以指示B个侧行资源有冲突和B个侧行资源不冲突这2种冲突状态。进一步地，若方式4指示这2种冲突状态，则可认为是ACK-NACK。若方式4只指示B个侧行资源有冲突，则可认为是ACK only。若方式4只指示B个侧行资源不冲突，则可认为是NACK only。
为便于理解，下面结合图1示出的时频资源，通过两个示例对冲突状态指示方式进行介绍。
示例1：A个侧行资源为图1所示的侧行资源R1-R6，B个侧行资源为图1所示的侧行资源R1-R4。
若采用方式1指示，则侧行资源R1-R4冲突状态一共有2 4＝16种，如下表1A所示。
表1A
冲突状态 侧行资源R1 侧行资源R2 侧行资源R3 侧行资源R4
1 冲突 冲突 冲突 冲突
2 冲突 冲突 冲突 不冲突
3 冲突 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
4 冲突 冲突 不冲突 冲突
5 冲突 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
6 冲突 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突
7 冲突 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
8 冲突 不冲突 冲突 冲突
9 不冲突 冲突 冲突 不冲突
10 不冲突 冲突 冲突 冲突
11 不冲突 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
12 不冲突 冲突 不冲突 冲突
13 不冲突 不冲突 冲突 冲突
14 不冲突 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
15 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
16 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
若采用方式2指示，则侧行资源R1-R4冲突状态一共有2 4-1＝15种，如下表1B所示。
表1B
冲突状态 侧行资源R1 侧行资源R2 侧行资源R3 侧行资源R4
1 冲突 冲突 冲突 不冲突
2 冲突 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
3 冲突 冲突 不冲突 冲突
4 冲突 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
5 冲突 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突
6 冲突 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
7 冲突 不冲突 冲突 冲突
8 不冲突 冲突 冲突 不冲突
9 不冲突 冲突 冲突 冲突
10 不冲突 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
11 不冲突 冲突 不冲突 冲突
12 不冲突 不冲突 冲突 冲突
13 不冲突 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
14 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
15 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
若采用方式3指示，则侧行资源R1-R4冲突状态一共有2 4-1＝15种，如下表1C所示。
表1C
冲突状态 侧行资源R1 侧行资源R2 侧行资源R3 侧行资源R4
1 冲突 冲突 冲突 冲突
2 冲突 冲突 冲突 不冲突
3 冲突 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
4 冲突 冲突 不冲突 冲突
5 冲突 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
6 冲突 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突
7 冲突 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
8 冲突 不冲突 冲突 冲突
9 不冲突 冲突 冲突 不冲突
10 不冲突 冲突 冲突 冲突
11 不冲突 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
12 不冲突 冲突 不冲突 冲突
13 不冲突 不冲突 冲突 冲突
14 不冲突 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
15 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
若采用方式4指示，则侧行资源R1-R4冲突状态一共有2 1＝2种，如下表1D所示。
表1D
冲突状态 侧行资源R1、侧行资源R2、侧行资源R3、侧行资源R4
1 侧行资源R1、侧行资源R2、侧行资源R3和侧行资源R4中有任一个冲突
2 侧行资源R1、侧行资源R2、侧行资源R3和侧行资源R4均不冲突
示例2：A个侧行资源为图1所示的侧行资源R1-R6，B个侧行资源为图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或者R2-R4。
若采用方式1指示，则侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4的冲突状态一共有2 3＝8种，如下表2A所示。
表2A
冲突状态 侧行资源R1/R4 侧行资源R2 侧行资源R3
1 冲突 冲突 冲突
2 冲突 冲突 不冲突
3 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
4 冲突 不冲突 冲突
5 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
6 不冲突 冲突 冲突
7 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
8 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
若采用方式2指示，则侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4的冲突状态一共有2 3-1＝7种，如下表2B所示。
表2B
冲突状态 侧行资源R1/R4 侧行资源R2 侧行资源R3
1 冲突 冲突 不冲突
2 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
3 冲突 不冲突 冲突
4 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
5 不冲突 冲突 冲突
6 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
7 不冲突 不冲突 不冲突
[根据细则91更正 03.09.2021]　
若采用方式3指示，则侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4的冲突状态一共有2 3-1＝7种，如下表2C所示。
表2C
冲突状态 侧行资源R1/R4 侧行资源R2 侧行资源R3
1 冲突 冲突 冲突
2 冲突 冲突 不冲突
3 冲突 不冲突 不冲突
4 冲突 不冲突 冲突
5 不冲突 不冲突 冲突
6 不冲突 冲突 冲突
7 不冲突 冲突 不冲突
若采用方式4指示，则侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4的冲突状态一共有2 1＝2种，如下表2D所示。
表2D
冲突状态 侧行资源R1/R4、侧行资源R2、侧行资源R3
1 侧行资源R1/R4、侧行资源R2和侧行资源R3中有任一个冲突
2 侧行资源R1/R4、侧行资源R2和侧行资源R3均不冲突
其中，结合表1A-1D可知，若采用碰前指示，则第二终端设备可以指示上述侧行资源R2-R4中至少一资源的一种冲突状态。若采用碰后指示，则第二终端设备可以指示上述侧行资源R1-R3中至少一资源的一种冲突状态。若采用碰前碰后指示，则第二终端设备可以指示上述侧行资源R1-R4中至少一资源的一种冲突状态。
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
因此，根据上述方式1-方式4的介绍可知，由于不同的冲突指示方式可以指示不同数量的冲突状态，那么不同的冲突指示方式对用于指示的资源的需求量也可以不同。如此，第三终端设备可以根据用于冲突指示的资源量，灵活选择匹配的指示方式。比如，若用于冲突指示的资源量充足，则第二终端设备可以选择方式1，以精确指示每个侧行资源冲突与否，从而能够准确地规避资源冲突。又比如，若用于冲突指示的资源量有限，则第二终端设备可以选择方式2或方式3，以实现既能够精确指示资源冲突，又能够节约资源开销，从而提高通信效率。再比如，若用于冲突指示的资源量有限，则第二终端设备还可以选择方式4，以最大程度地节约资源开销，从而进一步提高通信效率。此外，需要说明的是，若侧行资源为1个，即B＝1，则不论选择方式1-方式3还是选择方式4均能够精确地指示资源冲突。
进一步地，第一资源可以包括如下的一种或多种：第一频域资源、第一时域资源、第一码域资源、或第一比特域资源。其中，第一时域资源可以包括如下一种或多种：符号、时隙、迷你时隙、子帧或无线帧等。第一频域资源可以包括如下一种或多种：RE、RB、子信道、资源池、BWP、载波、或子载波，例如RE也可以是PRB，第一频域资源为PRB可以是PRB的频域位置和/或数量。第一码域资源可以用于生成第一消息。第一比特域资源可以为第一消息占用的比特数。第一码域资源可以包括如下的一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、基序列、或正交覆盖码，对此不予限定。
应理解，由于第一资源可以是任一种资源或多种资源的组合，故可以灵活指示B 个侧行资源的上述多种冲突状态。例如，若上述多种冲突状态的数量比较少，则可以选择任一种资源单独指示，以提高处理效率；或者，也可以选择多种资源组合指示，以降低每种资源的需求量，从而节约资源。又例如，若上述多种冲突状态的数量比较多，则可以选择多种资源组合指示，以确保指示的准确性。
可选地，第二终端设备可以被配置资源集合，如网络设备配置该资源集合。第一资源可以属于资源集合。资源集合可以包括如下一种或多种集合：时域资源集合、频域资源集合、码域资源集合、或比特域资源集合。资源集合中的每一个资源可以对应包括如下一种或多种：时域资源、频域资源、码域资源、或比特域资源，且每一个资源可以用于指示上述多种冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态。例如，资源集合包括频域资源集合和码域资源集合，频域资源集合中有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000001
个频域资源，码域资源集合中有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000002
个码域资源，则资源集合包括
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000003
个资源。一个频域资源和一个码域资源可以联合用于指示上述多种冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态。例如，资源集合包括频域资源集合和码域资源集合，一个PRB资源和一个循环移位码资源可以联合用于指示上述多种冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态。可选的，网络侧还可以配置冲突指示方式。由于不同指示策略的第一消息对应的情况是不一样的，所以应该配置或者指示给第二终端设备，便于第二终端设备理解信令的含义。具体而言，这个可以是无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)配置的、也可以是在第一消息中通过一个字段表明的、也可以是根据第一消息的指示内容隐式关联的。
具体而言，一种可能的方式下，RRC配置的用于在第一消息中指示的情形可以是如下情形中的一种：
情形1:第一消息指示上一个资源的碰撞，即碰后指示；
情形2:第一消息指示下一个资源的碰撞，即碰前指示；
情形3:第一消息指示周期内资源的碰撞；
情形4:第一消息指示周期内+周期间资源的碰撞；
情形5:第一消息指示周期间资源的碰撞；
情形6：不指示碰撞。
可以看出，不同的情形下对应的需要指示的情况数目不同。如情形3在资源数量为3个时，需要指示8种或7种情况。
具体而言，该RRC配置可以是per资源池的配置，如配置在SL-resourcepool IE中。
另一种可能的方式下，第二终端设备可以在第一消息中用一个字段表示第一消息可以指示上述多种情形的一种。其中，这个字段可以占用多个比特、可以占用不同的资源、可以使用不同的循环移位码、根序列等。
又一种可能的方式下，第一终端设备可以指示第二终端设备使用上述多种情形的一种，该指示可以是包含于第一终端设备发送的辅助请求信令中。
为便于理解下面以频域资源、码域资源、以及比特域资源为例进行介绍，时域资源的具体实现可以参考频域资源的相关内容，在此不再赘述。
一、频域资源集合
频域资源集合可以是根据网络设备的配置确定的。
具体地，网络设备，如基站可以配置PSFCH的相关资源，包括：
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000004
个PRB、N subch个子信道、
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000005
个时隙以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000006
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000007
为可用于承载PSFCH的PRB总数量，可以是正整数，如16或32等。N subch可以为资源池的子信道数量，可以是正整数，如20或40等，且
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000008
可以是N subch的整数倍，用于指示冲突的资源可以是周期分布的。其中，该周期可以为PSSCH的起始时域位置与PSFCH的起始时域位置之间间隔的
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000009
个时隙数，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000010
可以是正整数，如0、1、2或4等。如此，第二终端设备可根据
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000011
N subch以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000012
的关系，如
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000013
确定
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000014
个PRB，该
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000015
个PRB可以为用于承载第一消息的一组PRB。
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000016
可用于指示对于子信道数量为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000017
的PSSCH的冲突指示信息可以映射到
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000018
组PRB。其中，若
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000019
则表示上述一组PRB可映射到PSSCH对应的一个起始子信道，即第一消息可由起始子信道上的一组PRB承载。若
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000020
则表示上述一组PRB可映射到
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000021
个子信道，即第一消息可以由
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000022
个子信道上的
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000023
组PRB承载。可理解到，由于
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000024
可以指示PRB组的数量，那么第二终端设备可以根据
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000025
和
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000026
确定用于承载第一消息的多个PRB，即PRB集合，可以为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000027
进一步地，第二终端设备可以根据上述PRB集合、以及承载第一消息所需的PRB数量，确定上述频域资源集合。其中，该频域资源集合可以包括PRB集合的频域位置和/或承载第一消息所需的PRB数量。例如，若
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000028
N subch＝4、
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000029
以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000030
则第二终端设备可以确定PRB集合包括8个PRB。若承载第一消息所需的PRB数量为1个或2个，共计2种，则频域资源集合可以包括：8个PRB对应的8个频域位置和/或2种PRB数量。
二、码域资源集合
码域资源可以用于生成第一消息，包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、基序列、或正交覆盖码。为便于理解，下面以循环移位码为例进行介绍。
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
其中，码域资源集合可以是预配置或者预定义的，包括多个循环移位码，如4个、8个或12个循环移位码，且多个循环移位码的取值可以不连续，以确保冲突指示的准确性。
示例性地，不同循环移位码索引代表不同的冲突状态。冲突情况有2种，码域资源集合可以为循环移位码{0,6}。冲突情况有3种，码域资源集合可以为{0,4,8}。冲突情况有4种，码域资源集合可以为{0,3,6,9}。冲突情况有8种，码域资源集合可以为{0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7}。冲突情况有8种，码域资源集合可以为{0,1,3,4,6,7,9,10}。
三、比特域资源集合
其中，比特域资源可以为第一消息占用的比特数。
比特域资源集合可以是预配置或者预定义的，包括多个比特域资源，如4个、8个或12个比特域资源。每个比特域资源可以是单比特或多比特的字段，如2个或3个比特，对此不予限定。
进一步地，第二终端设备可以根据B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定第一资源。例如，第二终端设备可以配置上述多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态，与上述资源 集合中对应的一个资源的对应关系。如此，第二终端设备便可以根据B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态遍历对应关系，从而确定该B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态对应的第一资源，以便第二终端设备可以使用该第一资源发送第一消息。
示例性的，字段的不同取值代表不同的冲突状态。冲突情况有2种，比特域资源可以为{0,1}。冲突情况有3种，比特域资源可以为{01,10,11}。冲突情况有4种，比特域资源可以为{00,01,10,11}。冲突情况有7种，比特域资源可以为{001,010,011,100,101,110,111}。冲突情况有8种，比特域资源可以为{000,001,010,011,100,101,110,111}。
为便于理解，下面继续以上述示例1和示例2为例，对上述对应关系进行介绍。
示例1：
一种情况下，若资源集合包括2个码域资源，分别为循环移位码0和3，且B个侧行资源包括表1D中2种冲突状态，则配置的对应关系可以包括：
冲突状态1-循环移位码0；
冲突状态2-循环移位码3；
这样一来，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1-R3有任一个冲突，即冲突状态1，则可以根据冲突状态1-循环移位码0的对应关系，使用循环移位码0生成第一消息。若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1-R3均不冲突，即冲突状态2，则可以根据冲突状态2-循环移位码3的对应关系，使用循环移位码3生成第一消息。
另一种情况下，若资源集合包括2个码域资源和1个频域资源，分别为循环移位码0和3，以及频域位置1，且B个侧行资源包括表1D中2种冲突状态，则配置的对应关系可以包括：
冲突状态1-(循环移位码0,频域位置1)；
冲突状态2-(循环移位码3,频域位置1)；
这样一来，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1-R3有任一个冲突，即冲突状态1，则可以根据冲突状态1-(循环移位码0,频域位置1)的对应关系，使用循环移位码0生成第一消息，并在位于频域位置1的PRB上发送第一消息。若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1-R3均不冲突，即冲突状态2，则可以根据冲突状态2-(循环移位码3,频域位置1)的对应关系，使用循环移位码3生成第一消息，并在位于频域位置1的PRB1上发送第一消息。
示例2：
一种情况下，若资源集合包括8个码域资源，分别为循环移位码0-7，且B个侧行资源为表2A中8种冲突状态，则配置的对应关系可以包括：
冲突状态1-循环移位码0；
冲突状态2-循环移位码1；
冲突状态3-循环移位码2；
冲突状态4-循环移位码3；
冲突状态5-循环移位码4；
冲突状态6-循环移位码5；
冲突状态7-循环移位码6；
冲突状态8-循环移位码7；
这样一来，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1-R3冲突，即冲突状态1，则可以根据冲突状态1-循环移位码0的对应关系，使用循环移位码0生成第一消息。若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1冲突，且侧行资源R2-R3不冲突，即冲突状态2，则可以根据冲突状态2-循环移位码1的对应关系，使用循环移位码1生成第一消息。依此类推，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1-R3不冲突，即冲突状态8，则可以根据冲突状态8-循环移位码7的对应关系，使用循环移位码7生成第一消息。
另一种情况下，若资源集合包括2个码域资源、2个比特域资源和2个频域资源，分别为循环移位码0和1、比特字段0和1、频域位置1和2，且B个侧行资源为表2A中8种冲突状态，则配置的对应关系可以包括：
冲突状态1-(循环移位码0,比特字段0,频域位置1)；
冲突状态2-(循环移位码0,比特字段0,频域位置2)；
冲突状态3-(循环移位码1,比特字段1,频域位置1)；
冲突状态4-(循环移位码1,比特字段1,频域位置2)；
冲突状态5-(循环移位码0,比特字段1,频域位置1)；
冲突状态6-(循环移位码0,比特字段1,频域位置2)；
冲突状态7-(循环移位码1,比特字段0,频域位置1)；
冲突状态8-(循环移位码1,比特字段0,频域位置2)；
这样一来，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1-R3冲突，即冲突状态1，则可以根据冲突状态1-(循环移位码0,比特字段0,频域位置1)的对应关系，使用循环移位码0和比特字段0生成第一消息，并在位于频域位置1的PRB上发送第一消息。若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1冲突，且侧行资源R2-R3不冲突，即冲突状态2，则可以根据冲突状态2-(循环移位码0,比特字段0,频域位置2)的对应关系，使用循环移位码0和比特字段0生成第一消息，并在位于频域位置2的PRB上发送第一消息。依此类推，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R1-R3不冲突，即冲突状态8，则可以根据冲突状态8-(循环移位码1,比特字段0,频域位置2)的对应关系，使用循环移位码1和比特字段0生成第一消息，并在位于频域位置2的PRB上发送第一消息。
因此，根据上述对应关系的介绍可知，第二终端设备通过配置冲突状态与资源的对应关系，如此便能够快速定位每种冲突状态对应使用何种资源，从而能够有效提高第二终端设备的处理效率。
可选地，第一终端设备生成第一消息后，可以在第一消息对应的发送时机，向第一终端设备发送第一消息。如在时域位置距离最近一个PSFCH上发送该第一消息，但并不作为限定。其中，若承载第一消息的第一资源可指示多个不同的侧行资源冲突与否，则第二终端设备可通过一次性发送第一消息来指示多个不同的侧行资源冲突与否，或者，若承载第一消息的第一资源只指示一个侧行资源冲突与否，则第二终端设备可通过多次发送第一消息来指示多个不同的侧行资源冲突与否，但并不作为限定。
此外，第二终端设备不仅可以向第一终端设备发送第一消息，还可以向其它终端设备，如第二终端设备也发送第一消息。为便于理解，下面以图1-图3所示的场景为进行介绍，若终端设备C确定终端设备A与终端设备D(图2和图3中未示出)的 侧行资源R2冲突，并确定终端设备B与终端设备D的侧行资源R3冲突，则终端设备C不仅可以向终端设备A发送第一消息，以指示侧行资源R2冲突，还可以向终端设备B发送第一消息，以指示侧行资源R3冲突。换言之，第一消息不仅可以指示同一终端设备的资源冲突，还可以指示不同终端设备的资源冲突，从而可以节约信令开销，并提高通信效率。
S603，第一终端设备根据第一资源确定B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态。
其中，第一终端设备可以确定承载该第一消息的第一资源。具体地，若第一资源包括第一频域资源，则第一终端设备在接收第一消息时，可以确定承载第一消息的PRB的频域位置和/或数据，即确定第一频域资源。若第一资源包括第一码域资源和/或第一比特域资源，则第一终端设备可以通过解码第一消息，确定该第一码域资源和/或第一比特域资源。进一步地，第一终端设备也可以配置上述多种冲突状态中每种冲突状态，与上述资源集合中对应一个资源的对应关系。如此，第一终端设备在确定承载第一消息的第一资源后，便可以根据第一资源遍历对应关系，从而确定该第一资源对应的B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面继续以上述示例1和示例2为例，对上述对应关系进行介绍。
示例1：
一种情况下，若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码0，则可以根据冲突状态1-循环移位码0的对应关系，确定冲突状态1，即侧行资源R1-R3冲突。若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码3，则可以根据冲突状态2-循环移位码3的对应关系，确定冲突状态2，即侧行资源R1-R3均不冲突。
另一种情况下，若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码0和频域位置1，则可以根据冲突状态1-(循环移位码0,频域位置1)的对应关系，确定冲突状态1，即侧行资源R1-R3有任一个冲突。若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码3和频域位置1，则可以根据冲突状态2-(循环移位码3,频域位置1)的对应关系，确定冲突状态2，即侧行资源R1-R3均不冲突。
示例2：
一种情况下，若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码0，则可以根据冲突状态1-循环移位码0的对应关系，确定冲突状态1，即侧行资源R1-R3冲突。若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码1，则可以根据冲突状态2-循环移位码1的对应关系，确定冲突状态2，即侧行资源R1冲突，且侧行资源R2-R3不冲突。依此类推，若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码7，则可以根据冲突状态8-循环移位码7的对应关系，确定冲突状态8，即侧行资源R1-R3不冲突。
另一种情况下，若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码0、比特字段0和频域位置1，则可以根据冲突状态1-(循环移位码0,比特字段0,频域位置1)的对应关系，确定冲突状态1，即侧行资源R1-R3冲突。若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码0、比特字段0和频域位置2，则可以根据冲突状态2-(循环移位码0,比特字段0,频域位置2)的对应关系，确定冲突状态2，即侧行资源R1冲突，且侧行资源R2-R3不冲突。依此类推，若第一终端设备确定第一资源包括循环移位码1、比特字段0和频域位置2，则可以根据冲突状态8-(循环移位码1,比特字段0,频域 位置2)的对应关系，确定冲突状态8，即侧行资源R1-R3不冲突。
因此，根据上述对应关系的介绍可知，第一终端设备通过配置冲突状态与资源的对应关系，如此便能够快速定位每种冲突状态对应使用何种资源，从而能够有效提高第一终端设备的处理效率。
进一步地，第一终端设备在确定B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态后，便可以根据B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，更换B个侧行资源中冲突的侧行资源中的至少一个，以避免资源冲突。例如，若B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态采用上述方式1-3中任一种方式指示，则第一终端设备可以根据B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，更换B个侧行资源中所有有冲突的侧行资源。又例如，若B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态采用上述方式4指示，则第一终端设备可以将B个侧行资源全部更换，以避免发生资源冲突。
可选地，在本申请的一些应用场景中，第一资源可以整体指示B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，或者，第一资源也可以单独指示B个侧行资源中各侧行资源各自的一种冲突状态。下面具体介绍。
1、整体指示：
其中，整体指示是指：将第一资源整体与B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态关联，以降低资源与冲突状态之间对应关系的复杂度，从而提高处理效率。
例如，若B个侧行资源包括：上述第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源，则第二终端设备可以使用任一种资源或多种资源组合，指示该第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源的一种冲突状态。例如，图1所示，若B个侧行资源包括：侧行资源R2或侧行资源R2-R3，则第二终端设备可以使用任一种资源或多种资源组合，如频域资源，指示侧行资源R2，或者，侧行资源R2-R3的一种冲突状态。
又例如，若B个侧行资源包括上述第一侧行资源，则第二终端设备可以使用任一种资源或多种资源组合，指示该第一侧行资源的一种冲突状态。例如，图1所示，若B个侧行资源包括：侧行资源R1-R2或侧行资源R1-R3，则第二终端设备可以使用任一种资源或多种资源组合，如码域资源，指示侧行资源R1-R2，或者，侧行资源R1-R3的一种冲突状态。
再例如，若B个侧行资源包括上述第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源和第二侧行资源的一种冲突状态，则第二终端设备可以使用任一种资源或多种资源组合，指示该第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源和第二侧行资源的一种冲突状态。例如，图1所示，若B个侧行资源包括：侧行资源R3-R4或侧行资源R2-R4，则第二终端设备可以使用任一种资源指示侧行资源R3-R4，或者，侧行资源R2-R4的一种冲突状态。
还例如，若B个侧行资源包括上述第一侧行资源和第二侧行资源，则第二终端设备可以使用任一种资源或多种资源组合，指示该第一侧行资源和第二侧行资源的一种冲突状态。例如，图1所示，若B个侧行资源包括：侧行资源R1、R2和R4，或者，侧行资源R1-R4，则第二终端设备可以使用任一种资源指示侧行资源R1、R2和R4，或者，侧行资源R1-R4的一种冲突状态。
2、单独指示：
其中，单独指示是指：将第一资源中的各种资源分别与B个侧行资源中的各种侧行的一种冲突状态关联，以实现资源的解耦，从而提高指示精度。
例如，若B个侧行资源包括第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源，以及第二侧行资源，则第二终端设备可以使用第一种资源或多种资源的第一种组合，指示该第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源的一种冲突状态，并使用第二种资源(与第一种资源不同)或多种资源的第二种组合(与第一种组合不同)，指示该第二侧行资源的一种冲突状态。例如，图1所示，第二终端设备可以使用第一种资源或多种资源的第一种组合，如码域资源与比特域资源的组合，指示侧行资源R2，或者，侧行资源R2-R3的一种冲突状态，并使用第二种资源或多种资源的第二种组合，如频域资源，指示侧行资源R4的一种冲突状态。
又例如，若B个侧行资源包括承载第一侧行控制信息的资源，以及第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源，则第二终端设备可以使用第一种资源或多种资源的第一种组合，指示该承载第一侧行控制信息的资源的一种冲突状态，并使用第二种资源或多种资源的第二种组合，指示该第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源的一种冲突状态。例如，图1所示，第二终端设备可以使用第一种资源或多种资源的第一种组合，如码域资源与比特域资源的组合，指示侧行资源R1的一种冲突状态，并使用第二种资源或多种资源的第二种组合，如频域资源，指示侧行资源R2，或者，侧行资源R2-R3的一种冲突状态。
再例如，若B个侧行资源包括：第一侧行资源和第二侧行资源，则第二终端设备可以使用第一种资源或多种资源的第一种组合，指示该第一侧行资源的一种冲突状态，并使用第二种资源或多种资源的第二种组合，指示该第二侧行资源的一种冲突状态。例如，图1所示，第二终端设备可以使用第一种资源或多种资源的第一种组合，如码域资源与比特域资源的组合，指示侧行资源R1-R2，或者，侧行资源R1-R3的一种冲突状态，并使用第二种资源或多种资源的第二种组合，如频域资源，指示侧行资源R4的一种冲突状态。
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
可以理解到，在单独指示的情况下，第二终端设备可以根据B个侧行资源中各侧行资源各自的一种冲突状态，灵活使用第一资源。比如，若B个侧行资源中的某些侧行资源冲突，则可以在第一资源中使用该侧行资源冲突对应的资源，否则，可以不使用该侧行资源冲突对应的资源，以避免冗余指示，从而降低资源开销。
可选地，在本申请的一些应用场景中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置的上述对应关系可以是：不同业务的各种冲突状态与同一组资源对应关系。如此一来，不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示，从而可以降低资源需求量。
为便于理解，下面通过几种场景，分别介绍第一终端设备和第二终端设备如何配置不同业务的各种冲突状态与同一组资源对应关系。此外，为便于描述，以下将B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态称为第一冲突状态。
场景1：
场景1中，第二终端设备可以只使用同一组码域资源来指示不同业务的资源冲突。
其中，第二终端设备可以配置各业务的多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态，与码域 资源集合中对应的码域资源的对应关系，其中，多种冲突状态便对应多个码域资源。如此，第二终端设备在确定第一冲突状态后，便可根据对应关系确定对应的第一码域资源，以指示该第一冲突状态。相应地，第二终端设备也可以配置各业务的多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态，与码域资源集合中对应的码域资源的对应关系，其中，多种冲突状态便对应多个码域资源。如此，第一终端设备在确定第一码域资源后，便可根据对应关系确定第一冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面结合图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4，通过2个示例具体介绍不同业务的各种冲突状态与同一组资源对应关系。
示例3A：
其中，码域资源可以是循环移位码，但仅作为示例，不予限定。如码域资源也可以是根序列、基序列、或正交覆盖码，且后续示例可做相应理解，后续不再赘述。第一终端设备和第二终端设备有映射关系表3A。其中，映射关系表3A可以指示各业务的多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态与循环移位码的对应关系，如下表3A所示。
表3A
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000031
其中，侧行资源R1为检测到SCI的资源，侧行资源R2和R3为检测到SCI指示的重传预留资源，侧行资源R4为检测到SCI指示的周期预留资源。
根据上述碰前指示和碰后指示相关介绍可知。其中，在碰后指示中，冲突指示方式3表示了只有侧行资源R1冲突、只有侧行资源R2冲突、侧行资源R1和R2冲突、均不冲突四种中的一种。在碰前指示中，冲突指示方式3表示了只有侧行资源R4冲突、只有侧行资源R2冲突、侧行资源R4和R2冲突、以及均不冲突四种中的一种。
其中，在碰后指示中，冲突指示方式4表示了只有侧行资源R1冲突、只有侧行资源R2冲突、只有侧行资源R3冲突、只有侧行资源R1和R2冲突、只有侧行资源R1-R3冲突、只有侧行资源R2和R3冲突、侧行资源R1-R3冲突、均不冲突八种中的一种。在碰前指示中，冲突指示方式4表示了只有侧行资源R4冲突、只有侧行资源R2冲突、只有侧行资源R3冲突、只有侧行资源R4和R2冲突、只有侧行资源R4和R3冲突、只有侧行资源R2和R3冲突、侧行资源R2-R4冲突、均不冲突八种中的一种。
换言之，表3A中示出的指示方式可认为是ACK-NACK。
在此基础上，例如，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表3A中确定对应的循环移位码的取值等于6，以通过取值为6的循环移位码生成第一消息。相应地，第一终端设备接收第一消息后，则可以根据循环移位码的取值等于6，从表3A中确定侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
又例如，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源R3冲突，则可从表3A中确定对应的循环移位码的取值等于2，以通过取值为2的循环移位码生成第一消息。相应地，第一终端设备接收第一消息后，则可以根据循环移位码的取值等于2，从表3A中确定侧行资源R3冲突。
因此，根据表3A可知，不论是何种业务，只要有相同的侧行资源冲突，便可以对应到相同的码域资源，从而实现不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示。
示例3B：
其中，码域资源可以是循环移位码。第一终端设备和第二终端设备有映射关系表3B。其中，映射关系表3B可以指示各业务的多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态与循环移位码的对应关系，如下表3B所示。
表3B
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000033
其中，时频资源R1为检测到SCI的资源，时频资源R2和R3为检测到SCI指示的重传预留资源，时频资源R4为检测到SCI指示的周期预留资源。
其中，在碰后指示中，冲突指示方式3表示了只有时频资源R1冲突、只有时频资源R2冲突、时频资源R1和R2冲突三种中的一种。在碰前指示中，冲突指示方式3表示了只有时频资源R4冲突、只有时频资源R2冲突、时频资源R4和R2冲突三种中的一种。其中，在碰后指示中，冲突指示方式4表示了只有时频资源R1冲突、只有时频资源R2冲突、只有时频资源R3冲突、只有时频资源R1和R2冲突、只有时频资源R1和R3冲突、只有时频资源R2和R3冲突、时频资源R1-R3冲突种中的一种。在碰前指示中，冲突指示方式4表示了只有时频资源R4冲突、只有时频资源R2冲突、只有时频资源R3冲突、只有时频资源R4和R2冲突、只有时频资源R4和R3冲突、只有时频资源R2和R3冲突、时频资源R2-R4冲突七种中的一种。
换言之，表3B中示出的指示方式可认为是ACK only。此外，后续表4A-10C中关于碰前指示以及碰后指示含义可参考表3A和表3B的上述说明，后续不再赘述。
进一步地，在此基础上，例如，若第二终端设备确定均不冲突，则可根据表3B确定无需指示。又例如，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R3冲突，则可从表3B中确定对应的循环移位码的取值等于2，以通过取值为2的循环移位码生成第一消息。相应地，第一终端设备接收第一消息后，则可以根据循环移位码的取值等于2，从表3B中确定侧行资源R3冲突。
因此，根据表3B可知，不论是何种业务，只要有相同的侧行资源冲突，便可以对应到相同的码域资源，从而实现不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示。
场景2：
场景2中，第二终端设备可以只使用同一组频域资源来指示不同业务的资源冲突。
其中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以配置上述多种冲突状态的每种冲突状态与PRB集合中对应的PRB之间的对应关系，例如，配置每种冲突状态与第一频域资源索引的对应关系，其中，多种冲突状态可以对应多个第一频域资源索引，并配置每个第一频域资源索引与PRB集合中的PRB的对应关系。如此，第二终端设备在确定第一冲突状态后，便可根据冲突状态的对应关系，确定第一频域资源索引，然后根据第一频域资源索引的对应关系，确定对应的第一PRB，以通过第一PRB对应的第一频域资源指示该第一冲突状态。相应地，第一终端设备在确定第一频域资源后，便可根据第一频域资源对应的第一PRB的对应关系，确定第一频域资源索引，从而根据第一频域资源索引的对应关系，确定第一冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面结合图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4，通过2个示例具体介绍不同业务的各种冲突状态与同一组资源对应关系。
示例4A：
其中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备有映射关系表4A。其中，映射关系表4A可以指示各业务的多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态与第一频域资源索引，即与PRB index的对应关系，如下表4A所示。
表4A
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000035
在此基础上，例如，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源只有R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表4A中确定对应的PRB index＝6。如此，第二终端设备可以在PRB index＝6对应的第一频域资源上发送第一消息。
相应地，第一终端设备在第一频域资源上接收第一消息后，则可以根据第一频域资源对应PRB index＝6，从表4A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
又例如，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R3冲突，则可从表4A中确定对应的PRB index＝2。如此，第二终端设备可以在PRB index＝2对应的第一频域资源上发送第一消息。
相应地，第一终端设备在第一频域资源上接收第一消息后，则可以根据第一频域资源对应PRB index＝2，从表4A中确定只有侧行资源R3冲突。
因此，根据表4A可知，不论是何种业务，只要有相同的侧行资源冲突，便可以对应到相同的频域资源，从而实现不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示。
示例4B：
其中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备有映射关系表4B。其中，映射关系表4B可以指示各业务的多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态与第一频域资源索引的对应关系，如下表4B所示。
表4B
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000036
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000037
在此基础上，例如，若第二终端设备确定均不冲突，则可根据表4B确定无需指示。
又例如，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R3冲突，则可从表4A中确定对应的PRB index＝2。如此，第二终端设备可以在PRB index＝2对应的第一频域资源上发送第一消息。相应地，第一终端设备在第一频域资源上接收第一消息后，则可以根据第一频域资源对应PRB index＝2，从表4A中确定只有侧行资源R3冲突。
因此，根据表4B可知，不论是何种业务，只要有相同的侧行资源冲突，便可以对应到相同的频域资源，从而实现不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示。
场景3：
场景3中，第二终端设备可以只使用同一组比特域资源来指示不同业务的资源冲突。
其中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以配置上述多种冲突状态的每种冲突状态与比特域资源集合中对应的比特域资源之间的对应关系，例如，配置每种冲突状态与第一比特域资源索引的对应关系，其中，多种冲突状态可以对应多个第一比特域资源索引，并配置每个第一比特域资源索引与比特域资源集合中的比特域资源的对应关系。
如此，第二终端设备在确定第一冲突状态后，便可根据冲突状态的对应关系，确定第一比特域资源索引，然后根据第一比特域资源索引的对应关系，确定对应的第一比特域资源，以指示该第一冲突状态。相应地，第一终端设备在确定第一比特域资源后，便可根据第一比特域资源的对应关系，确定第一比特域资源索引，从而根据第一比特域资源索引的对应关系，确定第一冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面结合图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4，通过2个示例具体介绍不同业务的各种冲突状态与同一组资源对应关系。
示例5A：
其中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备有映射关系表5A。其中，映射关系表5A可以指示各业务的多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态与第一比特域资源索引，即与bit index的对应关系，如下表5A所示。
表5A
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000038
在此基础上，例如，若第二终端设备确定侧行资源只有R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表5A中确定对应的bit index＝6。如此，第二终端设备可以使用bit index＝6对应的第一比特域资源生成第一消息。相应地，第一终端设备在接收第一消息并确定第一比特域资源后，则可以根据第一比特域资源对应bit index＝6，从表5A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
又例如，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R3冲突，则可从表5A中确定对应的bit index＝2。如此，第二终端设备可以使用bit index＝2对应的第一比特域资源生成第一消息。相应地，第一终端设备在接收第一消息并确定第一比特域资源后，则可以根据第一比特域资源对应bit index＝2，从表5A中确定只有侧行资源R3冲突。
因此，根据表5A可知，不论是何种业务，只要有相同的侧行资源冲突，便可以对应到相同的比特域资源，从而实现不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示。
示例5B：
其中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备有映射关系表5B。其中，映射关系表5B可 以指示各业务的多种冲突状态中的每种冲突状态与第一比特域资源的对应关系，如下表5B所示。
表5B
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000039
在此基础上，例如，若第二终端设备确定均不冲突，则可根据表5B确定无需指示。
又例如，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R3冲突，则可从表5B中确定对应的bit index＝2。如此，第二终端设备可以使用bit index＝2对应的第一比特域资源生成第一消息。相应地，第一终端设备在接收第一消息并确定第一比特域资源后，则可以根据第一比特域资源对应bit index＝2，从表5B中确定只有侧行资源R3冲突。
因此，根据表5B可知，不论是何种业务，只要有相同的侧行资源冲突，便可以对应到相同的比特域资源，从而实现不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示。
场景4：
场景4中，第二终端设备可以使用如下多种资源：码域资源、频域资源、或比特域资源组合指示资源冲突。为便于理解，下面以码域资源与频域资源组合指示资源冲 突为例进行介绍。
其中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以配置上述多种冲突状态的每种冲突状态分别，与码域资源集合中对应的码域资源，以及频域资源集合中对应的频域资源的对应关系。例如，配置每种冲突状态与组合索引的对应关系，并配置每个组合索引分别，与码域资源集合中对应的码域资源，以及频域资源集合中对应的频域资源的对应关系。如此，第二终端设备在确定出第一冲突状态后，便可根据对应关系确定第一冲突状态对应的组合索引，从而根据对应关系确定组合索引对应的第一码域资源和第一频域资源，以指示该第一冲突状态。相应地，第二终端设备在接收到第一消息并确定第一码域资源和第一频域资源后，便可以根据组合索引与资源的对应关系，确定第一码域资源和第一频域资源对应的组合索引，从而再根据第一码域资源和第一频域资源对应的组合索引与冲突状态的对应关系，确定第一冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面结合图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4，通过2个示例具体介绍不同业务的各种冲突状态与同一组资源对应关系。
示例6A：
其中，码域资源可以是循环移位码。第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表6A。其中，映射关系表6A可以指示每种冲突状态与组合索引资源(C i)的对应关系，如下表6A所示。
表6A
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000040
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000041
其中，C i的取值为0到码域资源个数
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000042
乘以PRB资源个数
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000043
再减1，即
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000044
此外，第一终端设备和第二终端设备还配置有映射关系表6B。其中，映射关系表6B可以指示每种组合索引与码域资源和第一频域资源索引对应关系，如下表6B所示。
表6B
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000045
在此基础上，例如，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表6A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应的C i＝6。然后，第二终端设备可以根据C i＝6，从表6B中确定码域资源的取值等于9，以及PRB index＝0。换言之，第二终端设备可以通过取值为9的码域资源，以及PRB index＝0对应的频域资源，指示只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
相应地，第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，可以根据PRB index＝0对应的频域资源，以及码域资源的取值等于9，从表6B确定C i＝6，从而根据C i＝6，从表6B中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
又例如，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R3冲突，则可从表6A中确定只有侧行资源R3冲突对应的Ci＝2。然后，第二终端设备可以根据Ci＝2，从表6B中确定码域资源的取值等于3，以及PRB index＝0。换言之，第二终端设备可以通过取值为3的码域资源，以及PRB index＝0对应的频域资源，指示只有侧行资源R3冲突。
相应地，第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，可以根据PRB index＝0对应的频域资源，以及码域资源的取值等于3，从表6B确定C i＝2，从而根据C i＝2，从表6B中确定只有侧行资源R3冲突。
因此，根据表6A和6B可知，不论是何种业务，只要有相同的侧行资源冲突，便可以对应到相同的码域资源和频域资源，从而实现不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示。
示例6B：
其中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表6C。其中，映射关系表6C可以指示每种冲突状态与组合索引资源的对应关系，如下表6C所示。
表6C
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000046
此外，第一终端设备和第二终端设备还配置有映射关系表6B。其中，映射关系表6B可以指示每种组合索引与码域资源和第一频域资源索引对应关系，如上表6B所示。
在此基础上，例如，若第二终端设备确定均不冲突，则可根据表6C确定无需指示。
又例如，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R3冲突，则可从表6C中确定只有侧行资源R3冲突对应的Ci＝2。然后，第二终端设备可以根据Ci＝2，从表6B中确定码域资源的取值等于3，以及PRB index＝0。换言之，第二终端设备可以通过取值为3的码域资源，以及PRB index＝0对应的频域资源，指示只有侧行资源R3冲突。相应地，第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，可以根据PRB index＝0对应的频域资源，以及码域资源的取值等于3，从表6C确定C i＝2，从而根据C i＝2，从表6B中确定只有侧行资源R3冲突。
因此，根据表6C和6B可知，不论是何种业务，只要有相同的侧行资源冲突， 便可以对应到相同的码域资源和频域资源，从而实现不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由同一种资源指示。
可选地，在本申请的一些应用场景中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置的上述对应关系还可以是：不同业务的各种冲突状态与不同的资源组对应关系。如此一来，不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由不同的资源指示，进而可避免误指示，提高指示准确性。
具体而言，第二终端设备可以根据第一侧行控制信息指示的第一业务标识，确定第一资源索引，从而根据第一资源索引和第一冲突状态，确定第一资源。其中，第一资源索引与第一业务标识可以满足如下关系：
R ID＝(X)modR RCI  (4)
其中，式(4)中，R ID为第一资源索引、X为第一业务标识、R RCI为上述资源集合中的资源数量。其中，第一资源索引以及资源数量的具体实现可以参考下述场景1-场景4。
应理解，由于不同的业务可以具有不同的业务标识，那么在冲突状态相同的情况下，根据不同的业务标识则可以确定不同的资源索引。又由于不同的资源索引可以对应不同的资源组，那么根据不同的资源索引便可确定不同的资源来指示同一种冲突状态。
需要说明的是，由于业务标识的类型比较多，那么用于式(4)的资源数量则可以相对多一些，以避免出现不同业务标识的取模结果相同，从而避免误指示，提高指示准确性。例如，若资源数量等于2，则业务标识等于4与业务标识等于6的取模结果相同，均为2，如此可能导致误指示。又例如，若资源数量等于10，则业务标识等于4的取模结果为4，而业务标识等于6的取模结果为6，如此可避免误指示。
可选地，上述式(4)所示的关系仅为一种示例性地方式，并不作为限定。比如，第一资源索引与第一业务标识也可以满足如下关系：
R ID＝(R′ ID+X)modR RCI  (5)
其中，式(5)中，R ID为第一资源索引、R′ ID为第一冲突状态对应的索引、X为第一业务标识、R RCI为上述资源集合中的资源数量。
为便于理解，下面以式(4)为例，继续通过场景1-场景4具体介绍第一资源索引与第一资源的对应关系。
场景1：
其中，在上述每种冲突状态与一个码域资源对应的基础上，第二终端设备可以根据码域资源的分组数量
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000047
配置
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000048
个不同的码域资源。其中，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000049
可以是网络设备，如基站预先配置的，可以为1、2、3或6等。如此，通过将
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000050
个码域资源分别与上述每种冲突状态对应的一个码域资源组合，使得每种冲突状态可以对应多个码域资源，以便不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由不同的码域资源指示。
具体而言，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以配置
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000051
个码域资源索引中的每个码域资源索引，与码域资源集合中的码域资源的对应关系，以便不同的码域资源索引对应的码域资源可以不同。以及，第一终端设备和第二终端设备还可以配置码域资源与码域资源组的对应关系。这样一来，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以根据每个码 域资源索引的对应关系，确定每个码域资源索引对应的码域资源。然后，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以根据码域资源与码域资源组的对应关系，将每个码域资源索引对应的码域资源，与上述多个码域资源组合，如进行码值相加，便可确定每个码域资源索引对应的一个码域资源组，从而将上述码域资源集合分为不同的多个码域资源组。如此，每个码域资源组中的码域资源可因码域资源索引对应的码域资源不同而不同，以便不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由不同码域资源组的码域资源指示，进而可避免误指示，提高指示准确性。
进一步地，结合上述分组流程可知，在确定出第一冲突状态后，第二终端设备可以根据上述式(4)、第一业务标识以及资源数量，确定该第一业务标识对应的第一码域资源索引。其中，场景1下，资源数量可以是
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000052
与上述多个PRB的数量之积、
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000053
与上述多个比特域资源的数量之积、或者
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000054
与上述多个比特域资源和上述多个PRB三者的数量之积。
其中，第一码域资源索引可以与上述多个码域资源组中的第一码域资源组对应。该第一码域资源组可以用于指示上述多种冲突状态。然后，第二终端设备可以根据每个码域资源索引的对应关系，确定第一码域资源索引对应的码域资源。进一步地，第二终端设备可以根据码域资源与码域资源组的对应关系，将第一码域资源索引对应的码域资源，与上述第一冲突状态对应的码域资源组合，如进行码值相加，便可确定出第一码域资源。其中，该第一码域资源属于上述第一码域资源组，可以用于指示第一冲突状态。
相应地，第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，首先可根据上述式(4)、第一消息中的第一业务标识以及场景1中的资源数量，确定该第一业务标识对应的第一码域资源索引。然后，第一终端设备可以根据每个码域资源索引的对应关系，确定该第一码域资源索引对应的码域资源。进一步地，第一终端设备可以根据码域资源与码域资源组的对应关系，将第一码域资源索引对应的码域资源与第一码域资源组合，如进行码值相减，以获得可确定用于确定第一冲突状态的码域资源。如此，第一终端设备可以根据每种冲突状态与码域资源的对应关系，确定第一业务对应的第一冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面结合图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4，通过两个示例具体介绍码域资源索引与码域资源的对应关系。
示例7A：
其中，码域资源为循环移位码，码域资源索引为循环移位码索引，但仅作为一个示例，不予限定。例如，码域资源也可以是根序列、基序列、或正交覆盖码，则码域资源索引可以对应为根序列索引、基序列索引、或正交覆盖码索引，且后续示例可做相应理解，在此不再赘述。
首先，若资源数量为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000055
与上述多个PRB的数量之积，且多个PRB的数量等于3，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000056
等于6，则用于取模运算的第一矩阵可以如图7所示。其中，第一矩阵的横列包括6个循环移位码索引，分别为CS set0index＝0、CS set1index＝1、CS set2index＝2、CS set3index＝3、CS set4index＝4以及CS set5index＝5。第一矩阵的纵列包括上述3个PRB的频域资源索引，分别为PRB index＝0、PRB index＝1以及PRB index＝2。图7中箭头所示的方向为取模运算的执行方向。
其次，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表7A。其中，映射关系表7A可以指示每种冲突指示方式中的每种冲突状态与循环移位码的对应关系，如下表7A所示。
表7A
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000057
再者，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表7B。其中，映射关系表7B可以指示每个循环移位码索引与循环移位码对应关系，以及指示每个循环移位码索引、每种冲突指示方式与分组数量三者之间的对应关系，如下表7B所示。
表7B
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000058
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000059
其中，表7B中的m 0可以是变量，用于表示上述每个循环移位码索引对应的循环移位码。
在此基础上，例如，若第一业务的业务标识的取值等于6，则第二终端设备可以按图7中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定CS set1index＝1，PRB index＝2。若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表7A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应的循环移位码的取值等于6。然后，第二终端设备可以根据CS set1index＝1，以及冲突指示方式3，从表7B中确定m 0＝1。如此，第二终端设备可以确定循环移位码为6+1＝7。换言之，第二终端设备可以通过取值为7的循环移位码指示第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，并且，该第一消息可以承载于PRB index＝2的PRB上。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000060
以及冲突指示方式3。第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于6，按图7中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定CS set1index＝1，并根据CS set1index＝1以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000061
在表7B中确定m 0＝1。然后，第一终端设备根据循环移位码的取值为7以及m 0＝1，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的循环移位码的取值为7-1＝6。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该循环移位码的取值等于6以及冲突指示方式3，从表7A中确定第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
又例如，若第二业务的业务标识的取值等于8，则第二终端设备可以按图7中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定CS set2index＝2，PRB index＝2。若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可以从表7A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应的循环移位码的取值等于6。然后，第二终端设备可以根据CS set2index＝2，以及冲突指示方式3，从表7B中确定m 0＝2。如此，第二终端设备可以确定循环移位码为6+2＝8。换言之，第二终端设备可以通过取值为8的循环移位码指示第二业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，并且该第一消息可以承载于PRB index＝1的PRB上，从而实现了对不同的业务的同一种冲突状态采用不同的码域资源进行指示。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000062
以及冲突指示方式3。第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于8，按图7中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定CS set1index＝2，并根据CS set1index＝2以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000063
在表7B中确定m 0＝2。然后，第一终端设备根据循环移位码的 取值为8以及m 0＝2，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的循环移位码的取值为8-2＝6。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该循环移位码的取值等于6以及冲突指示方式3，从表7B中确定第二业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
之后，若有其它种类的冲突状态也可以依此类推，在此不再赘述。总而言之，第二终端设备无论确定哪一种冲突状态，均可以通过遍历表7A和7B，快速准确地确定出该冲突状态对应的一种码域资源。
示例7B：
其中，码域资源为循环移位码，码域资源索引为循环移位码索引。
首先，若资源数量为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000064
与上述多个PRB的数量之积，且多个PRB的数量等于4，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000065
等于6，则用于取模运算的第二矩阵可以如图8所示。其中，第二矩阵的横列包括6个循环移位码索引，分别为CS set0index＝0、CS set1index＝1、CS set2index＝2、CS set3index＝3、CS set4index＝4以及CS set5index＝5。第二矩阵的纵列包括上述4个PRB的频域资源索引，分别为PRB index＝0、PRB index＝1、PRB index＝2以及PRB index＝3。图8中箭头所示的方向为取模运算的执行方向。
其次，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表7C。其中，映射关系表7C可以指示每种冲突指示方式中的每种冲突状态与循环移位码的对应关系，如下表7C所示。
表7C
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000066
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000067
再者，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表7D。其中，映射关系表7D可以指示每个循环移位码索引与循环移位码对应关系，以及指示每个循环移位码索引、每种冲突指示方式与分组数量三者之间的对应关系，如下表7D所示。
表7D
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000068
其中，表7D中的m 0可以是变量，也可以用于表示上述每个循环移位码索引对应的循环移位码。
进一步地，例如，若业务标识的取值等于4，则第二终端设备可以按图8中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定CS set1index＝0，PRB index＝3。之后，若第二终端设备确定均不冲突，则可根据表7C而不执行指示。
又例如，若第三业务的业务标识的取值等于4，则第二终端设备可以按图8中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定CS set1index＝0。若第二终端设备确定只有R2冲突，则可从表7C中确定只有侧行资源R2冲突可以由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2冲突对应的循环移位码的取值等于4。然后，第二终端设备可以根据CS set1index＝0，以及冲突指示方式3，从表7D中确定m 0＝0。如此，第二终端设备可以确定循环移位码的取值为4+0＝4。换言之，第二终端设备可以通过取值为4的循环移位码指示第三业务只有侧行资源R2冲突，并且，该第一消息可以承载于PRB index＝3的PRB上。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000069
以及冲突指示方式3。第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于4，按图8中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定CS set1index＝0，并根据CS set1 index＝0以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000070
在表7D中确定m 0＝0。然后，第一终端设备根据循环移位码的取值为4以及m 0＝0，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的循环移位码的取值为4-0＝4。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该循环移位码的取值等于4以及冲突指示方式3，从表7C中确定第三业务只有侧行资源R2冲突。
之后，若有其它种类的冲突状态也可以依此类推，在此不再赘述。总而言之，第二终端设备无论确定哪一种冲突状态，均可以通过遍历表7C和7D，快速准确地确定出该冲突状态对应的一种码域资源。
场景2：
其中，在上述每种冲突状态与一个第一频域资源索引对应的基础上，第二终端设备可以根据频域资源的分组数量
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000071
配置
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000072
个不同的第二频域资源索引。其中，第二频域资源索引可以用于资源分组。
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000073
可以是网络设备配置的，可以为1、2、3或6等。如此，第二终端设备通过将
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000074
个第二频域资源索引分别与每种冲突状态对应的一个第一频域资源索引组合，使得每种冲突状态可以对应不同的频域资源索引，从而对应不同的频域资源，以便不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由不同的频域资源指示。
具体而言，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以配置
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000075
个第二频域资源索引中的每个第二频域资源索引，与第一频域资源索引的对应关系，以便第二频域资源索引对应第一频域资源索引可以不同。以及，第一终端设备和第二终端设备还可以配置第一频域资源索引与第三频域资源索引的对应关系。这样一来，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以根据第二频域资源索引的对应关系，确定每个第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引。然后，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以根据第三频域资源索引的对应关系，将每个第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引，与上述多种第一频域资源索引组合，如进行索引相加，便可确定每个第二频域资源索引对应的第三频域资源索引集合。
其中，由于每个第三频域资源索引集合可以对应一个PRB组，如此便可确定出多个PRB组，以实现对PRB集合的分割，并建立每个。应理解，由于不同的第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索进行组合可以获得不同的第三频域资源索引，故使得每个PRB组内的PRB可因第三频域资源索引的不同而不同，以便不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由不同PRB组的频域资源指示，进而可避免误指示，提高指示准确性。
进一步地，结合上述分组流程可知，在确定出第一冲突状态后，第二终端设备可以根据上述式(4)、第一业务标识以及资源数量，确定第一业务标识对应的第二频域资源索引。其中，场景2下，资源数量可以是
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000076
与上述多个码域资源的数量之积、
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000077
与上述多个比特域资源的数量之积、或者
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000078
与上述多个比特域资源和上述多个码域资源三者的数量之积。其中，该第一业务标识对应的第二频域资源索引可以与上述多个PRB组中的第一PRB组对应。该第一PRB组可以用于指示第一业务的上述多种冲突状态。然后，第二终端设备可以根据第二频域资源索引的对应关系，确定该第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引。进一步地，第二终端设备可以根据第三频域资源索引的对应关系，将该第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引， 与上述第一冲突状态对应的第一频域资源索引组合，如进行索引相加，便可以确定出第三频域资源索引。如此，第二终端设备可以根据每个第三频域资源索引集合与一个PRB组的对应关系，确定第三频域资源索引对应的上述第一频域资源，以指示第一冲突状态。
相应地，第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，可根据上述式(4)、第一消息中的第一业务标识以及场景1中的资源数量，确定该第一业务标识对应的第二频域资源索引。然后，第一终端设备可以根据每个第二频域资源索引的对应关系，确定第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引。以及，第一终端设备可以根据每个第三频域资源索引集合与一个PRB组的对应关系，确定第一频域资源对应的第三频域资源索引。再者，第一终端设备可以根据第一频域资源索引与第三频域资源索引的对应关系，将第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引，与第一频域资源对应的第三频域资源索引组合，如进行索引相减，以获得可用于确定第一冲突状态的第一频域资源索引。如此，第一终端设备可以根据每种冲突状态与第一频域资源索引的对应关系，确定第一业务对应的第一冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面结合图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4，通过两个示例具体介绍频域资源索引与频域资源的对应关系。
示例8A：
首先，若资源数量为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000079
与上述多个码域资源的数量之积，且多个码域资源的数量等于3，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000080
等于6，则用于取模运算的第三矩阵可以如图9所示。其中，第三矩阵的横列包括6个PRB组各自的第二频域资源索引，分别为PRB set0index＝0、PRB set1index＝1、PRB set2index＝2、PRB set3index＝3、PRB set4index＝4以及PRB set5index＝5。第三矩阵的纵列包括上述3个码域资源的码域资源索引，分别为CS index＝0、CS index＝1以及CS index＝2。图9中箭头所示的方向为取模运算的执行方向。
其次，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表8A。其中，映射关系表8A可以指示每种冲突指示方式中的每种冲突状态与第一频域资源索引，即PRB index的对应关系，如下表8A所示。
表8A
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000081
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000082
再者，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表8B。其中，映射关系表8B可以指示每个第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引对应关系，以及指示每个第一频域资源索引、每种冲突指示方式与分组数量三者之间的对应关系，如下表8B所示。
表8B
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000083
其中，表8B中的m 0可以是变量，可以用于表示上述每个第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引。
在此基础上，例如，若第一业务的业务标识的取值等于6，则第二终端设备可以按图9中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定PRB set1index＝1。若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表8A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4 冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应PRB index＝6。然后，第二终端设备可以根据PRB set1index＝1，以及冲突指示方式3，从表8B中确定m 0＝1。如此，第二终端设备可以确定第三频域资源索引为6+1＝7，从而确定第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，可以由PRB set1中第三频域资源索引为7对应的频域资源指示，并在第三频域资源索引对应的PRB上发送该第一消息。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000084
以及冲突指示方式3。在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于6，按图9中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定确定PRB set1index＝1，并根据确定PRB set1index＝1以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000085
在表8B中确定m 0＝1。然后，第一终端设备根据第三频域资源索引的取值为7以及m 0＝1，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的第一频域资源索引的取值为7-1＝6。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该第一频域资源索引的取值等于6以及冲突指示方式3，从表8A中确定第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
又例如，若第二业务的业务标识的取值等于8，则第二终端设备可以按图9中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定PRB set2index＝2。之后，若第二终端设备确定只有R2和R1/R4冲突，则可以从表8A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应PRB index＝6。然后，第二终端设备可以根据PRB set2index＝2，以及冲突指示方式3，从表8B中确定m 0＝2。如此，第二终端设备可以确定第三频域资源索引为2+6＝8，从而确定第二业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，可以由PRB set2中第三频域资源索引为8对应的频域资源指示，并在第三频域资源索引对应的PRB上发送该第一消息，从而实现了不同业务的同一种资源冲突可以由不同的频域资源指示。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000086
以及冲突指示方式3。在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于8，按图9中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定确定PRB set1index＝2，并根据确定PRB set1index＝2以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000087
在表8B中确定m 0＝2。然后，第一终端设备根据第三频域资源索引的取值为8以及m 0＝2，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的第一频域资源索引的取值为8-2＝6。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该第一频域资源索引的取值等于6以及冲突指示方式3，从表8A中确定第二业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
之后，若有其它种类的冲突状态也可以依此类推，在此不再赘述。总而言之，第二终端设备无论确定哪一种冲突状态，均可以通过遍历表8A和8B，快速准确地确定出该冲突状态对应的一种频域资源。
示例8B：
首先，若资源数量为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000088
与上述多个码域资源的数量之积，且多个码域资源的数量等于3，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000089
等于6，则用于取模运算的第四矩阵可以如图10所示。其中，第四矩阵的横列包括6个PRB组各自的第二频域资源索引，分别为PRB set0index＝0、PRB set1index＝1、PRB set2index＝2、PRB set3index＝3、PRB set4index＝4以及PRB set5index＝5。第四矩阵的纵列包括上述4个码域资源的码域资源索引，分别为CS index＝0、CS index＝1、CS index＝2以及CS index＝3。图10中箭头所示的方向为取模运算的执行方向。
其次，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表8C。其中，映射关系表8C可以指示每种冲突指示方式中的每种冲突状态与第一频域资源索引，即PRB index的对应关系，如下表8C所示。
表8C
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000090
再者，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表8D。其中，映射关系表8D可以指示每个第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引对应关系，以及指示每个第一频域资源索引、每种冲突指示方式与分组数量三者之间的对应关系，如下表8D所示。
表8D
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000091
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000092
其中，表8B中的m 0可以是变量，可以用于表示上述每个第二频域资源索引对应的第一频域资源索引。
进一步地，例如，若业务标识的取值等于4，则第二终端设备可以按图10中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定PRB set1index＝0。之后，若第二终端设备确定均不冲突，则可根据表8C而不执行指示。
又例如，若第三业务的业务标识的取值等于4，则第二终端设备可以按图10中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定PRB set1index＝0。之后，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2冲突，则可从表8C中确定只有侧行资源R2冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定侧行资源R2冲突对应PRB index＝4。然后，第二终端设备可以根据PRB set1index＝0，以及冲突指示方式3，从表8D中确定m 0＝0。如此，第二终端设备可以确定第三频域资源索引为4+0＝4，从而确定第三业务只有侧行资源R2冲突，可以由PRB set1中第三频域资源索引为4对应的频域资源指示，并在第三频域资源索引对应的PRB。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000093
以及冲突指示方式3。在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于4，按图10中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定确定PRB set1index＝4，并根据确定PRB set1index＝4以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000094
在表8D中确定m 0＝0。然后，第一终端设备根据第三频域资源索引的取值为4以及m 0＝0，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的第一频域资源索引的取值为4-0＝4。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该第一频域资源索引的取值等于4以及冲突指示方式3，从表8C中确定第三业务只有侧行资源R2冲突。
之后，若有其它种类的冲突状态也可以依此类推，在此不再赘述。总而言之，第二终端设备无论确定哪一种冲突状态，均可以通过遍历表8C和8D，快速准确地确定出该冲突状态对应的一种频域资源。
场景3：
其中，在上述每种冲突状态与一个第一比特域资源索引对应的基础上，第二终端设备可以根据比特域资源的分组数量
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000095
配置
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000096
个不同的第二比特域资源索引。其中，第二比特域资源索引可以用于资源分组。
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000097
可以是网络设备配置的，可以为1、2、3或6等。如此，第二终端设备通过将
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000098
个第二比特域资源索引分别与每种冲突状态对应的一个第一比特域资源索引组合，使得每种冲突状态可以对应不同的比特域资源索引，从而对应不同的比特域资源，以便不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由 不同的比特域资源指示。
具体而言，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以配置
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000099
个第二比特域资源索引中的每个第二比特域资源索引，与第一比特域资源索引的对应关系，以便不同第二比特域资源索引对应第一比特域资源索引可以不同。以及，第一终端设备和第二终端设备还可以配置第一比特域资源索引与第三比特域资源索引的对应关系。这样一来，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以根据第二比特域资源索引的对应关系，确定每个第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引。然后，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以根据第三比特域资源索引的对应关系，将每个第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引，与上述多种第一比特域资源索引组合，如进行索引相加，便可确定每个第二比特域资源索引对应的第三比特域资源索引集合。其中，由于每个第三比特域资源索引集合对应一个比特域资源组，如此便可确定出多个比特域资源组，以实现对比特域资源集合的分割。应理解，由于不同的第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索进行组合可以获得不同的第三比特域资源索引，故使得每个比特域资源组内的比特域资源可因第三比特域资源索不同而不同，以便不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由不同比特域资源组的比特域资源指示，进而可避免误指示，提高指示准确性。
进一步地，结合上述分组流程可知，在确定出第一冲突状态后，第二终端设备可以根据上述式(4)、第一终端业务标识以及资源数量，确定第一业务标识对应的第二比特域资源索引。其中，场景3下，资源数量可以是
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000100
与上述多个码域资源的数量之积、
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000101
与上述多个频域资源的数量之积、或者
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000102
与上述多个频域资源和上述多个码域资源三者的数量之积。其中，该第一业务标识对应的第二比特域资源索引可以与上述多个比特域资源组中的第一比特域资源组对应。该第一比特域资源组可以用于指示第一业务的的上述多种冲突状态。然后，第二终端设备可以根据第二比特域资源索引的对应关系，确定该第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引。进一步地，第二终端设备可以根据第三频域资源索引的对应关系，将该第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引，与上述第一冲突状态对应的第一比特域资源索引组合，如进行相加，便可以确定出第三比特域资源索引。如此，第二终端设备可以根据每个第三比特域资源索引集合与一个比特域资源组的对应关系，确定第三比特域资源索引对应的上述第一比特域资源，以指示第一冲突状态。
相应地，第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，可根据上述式(4)、第一消息中的第一业务标识以及场景1中的资源数量，确定该第一业务标识对应的第二比特域资源索引。然后，第一终端设备可以根据每个第二比特域资源索引的对应关系，确定第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引。以及，第一终端设备可以根据每个第三比特域资源索引集合与一个比特域资源组的对应关系，确定第一比特域资源对应的第三比特域资源索引。再者，第一终端设备可以根据第一比特域资源索引与第三比特域资源索引的对应关系，将第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引，与第一比特域资源对应的第三比特域资源索引组合，如进行索引相减，以获得可用于确定第一冲突状态的第一比特域资源索引。如此，第一终端设备可以根据每种冲突状态与第一比特域资源索引的对应关系，确定第一业务对应的第一冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面结合图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4，通过两个 示例具体介绍比特域资源索引与比特域资源的对应关系。
示例9A：
首先，若资源数量为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000103
与上述多个码域资源的数量之积，且多个码域资源的数量等于3，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000104
等于6，则用于取模运算的第五矩阵可以如图11所示。其中，第五矩阵的横列包括6个比特域资源组各自的第二比特域资源索引，分别为bit set0index＝0、bit set1index＝1、bit set2index＝2、bit set3index＝3、bit set4index＝4以及bit set5index＝5。第五矩阵的纵列包括上述3个码域资源的码域资源索引，分别为CS index＝0、CS index＝1以及CS index＝2。图11中箭头所示的方向为取模运算的执行方向。
其次，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表9A。其中，映射关系表9A可以指示每种冲突指示方式中的每种冲突状态与第一比特域资源索引，即bit index的对应关系，如下表9A所示。
表9A
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000105
再者，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表9B。其中，映射关系表9B可以指示每个第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引对应关系，以及指示每个第一比特域资源索引、每种冲突指示方式与分组数量三者之间的对应关系，如 下表9B所示。
表9B
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000106
其中，表9B中的m0可以是变量，可以用于表示上述每个第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引。
在此基础上，例如，第一业务的若业务标识的取值等于6，则第二终端设备可以按图11中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定bit set1index＝1。若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表9A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应的bit index＝6。然后，第二终端设备可以根据bit set1index＝6，以及冲突指示方式3，从表9B中确定m 0＝1。如此，第二终端设备可以确定第三比特域资源索引为6+1＝7，从而确定第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，可以由bit set1中第三比特域资源索引为7对应的比特域资源指示。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000107
以及冲突指示方式3。在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于6，按图11中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定确定bit set1index＝1，并根据确定bit set1index＝1以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000108
在表9B中确定m 0＝1。然后，第一终端设备根据第三比特域资源索引的取值为7以及m 0＝1，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的第一比特域资源索引的取值为7-1＝6。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该第一比特域资源索引的取值等于6以及冲突指示方式3，从表9A中确定第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
又例如，若第二业务的业务标识的取值等于8，则第二终端设备可以按图11中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定bit set2index＝2。若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可以从表9A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应的bit index＝6。然后，第二终端设备可以根据bit set2index＝6，以及冲突指示方式3，从表9B中确定 m 0＝2。如此，第二终端设备可以确定第三比特域资源索引为6+2＝8，从而确定第二业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，可以由bit set2中第三比特域资源索引为8对应的比特域资源指示，从而实现了不同业务的同一种资源冲突可以由不同的比特域资源指示。
之后，若有其它种类的冲突状态也可以依此类推，在此不再赘述。总而言之，第二终端设备无论确定哪一种冲突状态，均可以通过遍历表9A和9B，快速准确地确定出该冲突状态对应的一种比特域资源。
示例9B：
首先，若资源数量为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000109
与上述多个码域资源的数量之积，且多个码域资源的数量等于3，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000110
等于6，则用于取模运算的第六矩阵可以如图12所示。其中，第六矩阵的横列包括6个比特域资源组各自的第二比特域资源索引，分别为bit set0index＝0、bit set1index＝1、bit set2index＝2、bit set3index＝3、bit set4index＝4以及bit set5index＝5。第六矩阵的纵列包括上述4个码域资源的码域资源索引，分别为CS index＝0、CS index＝1、CS index＝2以及CS index＝3。图12中箭头所示的方向为取模运算的执行方向。
其次，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表9C。其中，映射关系表9C可以指示每种冲突指示方式中的每种冲突状态与第一比特域资源索引，即bit index的对应关系，如下表9C所示。
表9C
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000111
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000112
再者，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表9D。其中，映射关系表9D可以指示每个第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引对应关系，以及指示每个第一比特域资源索引、每种冲突指示方式与分组数量三者之间的对应关系，如下表9D所示。
表9D
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000113
其中，表9D中的m 0可以是变量，可以用于表示上述每个第二比特域资源索引对应的第一比特域资源索引。
进一步地，例如，若业务标识的取值等于4，则第二终端设备可以按图12中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定bit set1index＝0。之后，若第二终端设备确定第一冲突状态为均不冲突，则可根据表9C而不执行指示。
又例如，若第三业务的业务标识的取值等于4，则第二终端设备可以按图12中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定bit set1index＝0。之后，若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2冲突，则可从表9C中确定只有侧行资源R2冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定确定只有侧行资源R2冲突对应的bit index＝4。然后，第二终端设备可以根据bit set1index＝0，以及冲突指示方式3，从表9D中确定m 0＝0。如此，第二终端设备可以确定第三比特域资源索引为4+0＝4，从而确定第三业务只有侧行资源R2冲突，可以由bit set1中第三比特域资源索引为4对应的比特域资源指示。
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000114
以及冲突指示方式3。在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于6，按图12中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定确定bit set1index＝0，并根据确定bit set1index＝0以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000115
在表9D中 确定m 0＝0。然后，第一终端设备根据第三比特域资源索引的取值为4以及m 0＝0，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的第一比特域资源索引的取值为4-0＝4。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该第一比特域资源索引的取值等于4以及冲突指示方式3，从表9C中确定第一业务只有侧行资源R2冲突。
之后，若有其它种类的冲突状态也可以依此类推，在此不再赘述。总而言之，第二终端设备无论确定哪一种冲突状态，均可以通过遍历表9C和9D，快速准确地确定出该冲突状态对应的一种比特域资源。
场景4：
场景4中，第二终端设备可以使用如下多项资源：码域资源、频域资源、或比特域资源组合指示资源冲突。为便于理解，下面以第二终端设备使用码域资源与频域资源组合指示资源冲突为例进行介绍。
示例性地，根据上述场景1-3中介绍可知，第二终端设备可以采用资源分组的方式指示资源冲突。那么，在码域资源与频域资源组合指示的情况下，第二终端设备也可以采用资源分组或不分组的方式指示资源冲突，且分组或不分组的组合方式可以包括如下多种：使用同一组码域资源和不同组的频域资源的来指示不同业务的资源冲突(组合方式1)、可以使用不同组的码域资源和同一组频域资源的来指示不同业务的资源冲突(组合方式2)、或者使用不同组的码域资源和不同组的频域资源的来指示不同业务的资源冲突(组合方式3)。为便于理解，下面以组合方式1为例进行介绍。
组合方式1：
示例性地，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以根据
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000116
个不同的码域资源，将上述码域资源集合分为不同的多个码域资源组，以便不同业务的同一种冲突状态可以由一个频域资源和不同码域资源组的码域资源共同指示，进而可避免误指示，提高指示准确性。其中，确定码域资源组的具体实现可以参考上述场景1，在此不再赘述。
在分组的基础上，第一终端设备和第二终端设备还可以配置上述多种冲突状态的每种冲突状态，与码域资源集合中对应的码域资源以及频域资源集合中对应的频域资源的对应关系。例如，配置每种冲突状态与组合索引的对应关系，并配置每个组合索引分别与码域资源集合中对应的码域资源和频域资源集合中对应的频域资源的对应关系。
进一步地，在确定出上述第一冲突状态后，第二终端设备可以根据上述式(4)、第一业务标识以及资源数量，确定该第一业务标识对应的第一码域资源索引。然后，第二终端设备可以根据每个码域资源索引的对应关系，确定第一码域资源索引对应的码域资源。进一步地，第二终端设备可以根据组合索引的对应关系，确定第一冲突状态对应的组合索引，以及确定组合索引对应的码域资源和第一频域资源。如此，第二终端设备可以根据码域资源与码域资源组的对应关系，将第一码域资源索引对应的码域资源与组合索引对应的码域资源组合，如进行码值相加，便可确定出第一码域资源，从而通过第一码域资源和第一频域资源指示第一冲突状态。
相应地，第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，可根据上述式(4)、第一消息中的第一业务标识以及场景1中的资源数量，确定该第一业务标识对应的第一码域资源 索引。然后，第一终端设备可以根据每个码域资源索引的对应关系，确定第一码域资源索引对应的码域资源。以及，第一终端设备可以根据码域资源与码域资源组的对应关系，将第一码域资源索引对应的码域资源与第一码域资源进行组合，如进行码值相减，以获得可用于确定第一冲突状态的码域资源。如此，第一终端设备可以根据每种冲突状态与组合索引的对应关系，以及上述每个组合索引分别与码域资源和频域资源的对应关系，确定第一业务对应的第一冲突状态。
为便于理解，下面结合图1所示的侧行资源R1-R3或侧行资源R2-R4，通过2个示例介绍频域资源和码域资源与冲突状态之间的对应关系。
示例10A：
其中，码域资源为循环移位码，码域资源索引为循环移位码索引。
首先，若资源数量为
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000117
与上述多个PRB的数量之积，且多个PRB的数量等于3，
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000118
等于6，则用于取模运算的第一矩阵也可以如图7所示。
其次，第一终端设备和第二终端设备配置有映射关系表10A。其中，映射关系表10A可以指示每种冲突指示方式中的每种冲突状态与组合索引资源(C i)的对应关系，如下表10A所示。
表10A
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000119
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000120
此外，第一终端设备和第二终端设备还配置有映射关系表10B。其中，映射关系表10B可以指示每种组合索引与循环移位码和频域资源索引对应关系，如下表10B所示。
表10B
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000121
再者，第一终端设备和第二终端设备也配置有映射关系表10C。其中，映射关系表10C可以指示每个循环移位码索引与循环移位码对应关系，以及指示每个循环移位码索引、每种冲突指示方式与分组数量三者之间的对应关系，如下表10C所示。
表10C
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000122
其中，表10C中的m 0可以是变量，用于表示上述每个循环移位码索引对应的循环移位码。
在此基础上，例如，若第一业务的业务标识的取值等于6，则第二终端设备可以按图7中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定CS set1index＝1。若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表10A中确定只有侧行资源R2和 R1/R4冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应的C i＝6。如此，第二终端设备可以根据C i＝6，从表10B中确定循环移位码的取值等于9，以及PRB index＝0。以及，第二终端设备还可以根据CS set1index＝1以及冲突指示方式3，从表10C中确定m 0＝1。如此，第二终端设备可以确定循环移位码为9+1＝10。换言之，第二终端设备可以通过取值为10的循环移位码，以及PRB index＝0对应的频域资源，指示第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000123
以及冲突指示方式3。在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于6，按图7中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定CS set1index＝1，并根据CS set1index＝1以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000124
在表10C中确定m 0＝1。然后，第一终端设备根据循环移位码的取值为10以及m 0＝1，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的循环移位码的取值为10-1＝9。此外，第一终端设备可以根据频域资源的对应关系，确定第一消息中的频域资源对应PRB index＝0。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该循环移位码的取值等于9以及PRB index＝0，在表10B中确定C i＝6，从而根据C i＝6以及冲突指示方式3，从表10A中确定第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
又例如，若第二业务的业务标识的取值等于8，则第二终端设备可以按图7中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，从而确定CS set2index＝2。若第二终端设备确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，则可从表10A中确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突由冲突指示方式3指示，以及确定只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突对应的C i＝6。如此，第二终端设备可以根据C i＝6，从表10B中确定循环移位码的取值等于9，以及PRB index＝0。以及，第二终端设备还可以根据CS set1index＝2以及冲突指示方式3，从表10C中确定m 0＝2。如此，第二终端设备可以确定循环移位码为9+2＝11。换言之，第二终端设备可以通过取值为11的循环移位码，以及PRB index＝0对应的频域资源，指示第二业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突，从而实现了不同业务的同一种资源冲突可以由不同的码域资源和频域资源指示。
相应地，第一终端设备配置有
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000125
以及冲突指示方式3。在接收到第一消息后，第一终端设备根据业务标识的取值等于8，按图7中箭头所示的方向执行取模运算，可确定CS set1index＝2，并根据CS set1index＝2以及
Figure PCTCN2021072323-appb-000126
在表10C中确定m 0＝2。然后，第一终端设备根据循环移位码的取值为11以及m 0＝2，可以确定与一种冲突状态对应的循环移位码的取值为11-2＝9。此外，第一终端设备可以根据频域资源的对应关系，确定第一消息中的频域资源对应PRB index＝0。这样一来，第二终端设备根据该循环移位码的取值等于9以及PRB index＝0，在表10B中确定C i＝6，从而根据C i＝6以及冲突指示方式3，从表10A中确定第一业务只有侧行资源R2和R1/R4冲突。
之后，若有其它种类的冲突状态也可以依此类推，在此不再赘述。总而言之，第二终端设备无论确定哪一种冲突状态，均可以通过遍历表10A-10C，快速准确地确定出该冲突状态对应的一种码域资源和一种频域资源。
此外，上述组合方式2和组合方式3的具体实现可以参考上述组合方式1的相关介绍，在此不再赘述。
可选地，在本申请的一些应用场景中，第二终端设备不仅可以确定上述A个侧行资源的位置，还可以确定另外P个侧行资源的位置，并根据P个侧行资源的位置确定B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态。
其中，P为大于1的整数。P个侧行资源可以包括：第三侧行资源和第四侧行资源。第三侧行资源可以包括：承载第二侧行控制信息的资源和/或第二侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。其中，第二侧行控制信息的具体实现可以参考如下的两种设计方案。
其中，重传预留资源可以是1个或2个，可以位于第二周期。其中，第二周期可以是承载第二侧行控制信息的资源，如TB所在的周期，或者也可以是该周期之后的周期，对此不予限定。例如图1所示，承载第二侧行控制信息的资源可以是侧行资源R1，第二侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源可以是侧行资源R2和/或R3。第四侧行资源可以是第三侧行资源的周期预留资源，如可以是承载第二侧行控制信息的资源的周期预留资源，和/或，第二侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源的周期预留资源，并位于第二周期之后的第b个周期，b为大于或等于1的整数。例如图1所示，第四侧行资源可以是侧行资源R1的周期预留资源，如侧行资源R4。
一种可能的设计方案中，第二终端设备可以接收来自第三终端设备的第二侧行控制信息。其中，第二侧行控制信息可以指示P个侧行资源的位置，可是以如下一种或多种：SCI消息、MAC CE消息、RRC消息、或PC5-RRC消息。
其中，该第二侧行控制信息可以包括如下一项或多项：第二时域资源分配信息、第二频域资源分配信息、第二时频资源预留周期信息、第二业务标识以及第二业务的优先级信息。
进一步地，第二时域资源分配信息可以用于指示：第三侧行资源的时域位置，如第三侧行资源所在的时隙。第二频域资源分配信息可以用于指示：第三侧行资源的频域位置，如第三侧行资源占用的子信道的信息。第二时频资源预留周期信息可以用于指示第二侧行控制信息的周期，该周期也可以是[1:99]、100、200、300、400、500、600、700、800、900、1000毫秒等。换言之，第二侧行控制信息可通过第二时频资源分配信息和第二时频资源分配信息，指示第三侧行资源的位置，并通过第三侧行资源的位置与第二时频资源预留周期信息，指示第四侧行资源的位置。如此，第二终端设备根据第二侧行控制信息的指示，便可以确定P个侧行资源的位置。
此外，第二业务标识可以用于指示第二业务，第二业务与第一业务可以相同或者也可以不同。具体地，第二业务标识也可以是如下一项或多项：source ID、destination ID、member ID、优先级等。具体的，可以为第二控制信息中指示的source ID、destination ID、member ID、优先级等。第二业务的优先级信息可以用于指示第二业务的优先级。
另一种可能的设计方案中，第二终端设备可以发送第二侧行控制信息消息，如向第一终端设备或第三终端设备发送第二侧行控制信息消息。其中，第二侧行控制信息消息也可以指示P个侧行资源的位置。
进一步地，第二终端设备可以根据上述A个侧行资源的位置与上述P个侧行资源的位置，如根据A个侧行资源中每个侧行资源分别与P个侧行资源的位置关系， 以及根据预设的冲突指示方式，从而确定A个侧行资源中B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态(以下称为第一冲突状态)，B为小于或等于A的正整数。
其中，B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态可以是第二终端设备可以根据第一业务的优先级和第二业务的优先级确定的。比如，若第一业务的优先级低于第二业务的优先级，则第二终端设备可以确定B个侧行资源的第一冲突状态，并指示第一业务对应的终端设备，如第一终端设备。反之，若第一业务的优先级高于第二业务的优先级，则第二终端设备可以确定P个侧行资源中Q个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，并指示第二业务对应的终端设备，如第三终端设备。换言之，第二终端设备可以指示优先级低的业务更换侧行资源，以保证优先级高的业务的稳定性。应理解，上述优先级判断方式仅为举例，并不作为限定。
进一步地，第一业务标识和/或第一业务的优先级信息可以用于指示接收设备，如第一终端设备和/或第三终端设备判断是否处理该第一消息。例如，若接收设备确定第一业务标识与接收设备的业务标识相同，则处理该第一消息，否则，丢弃该第一消息。又例如，若接收设备根据第一业务的优先级信息，确定第一业务的优先级等级等于或低于接收设备的业务的优先级等级，则处理该第一消息，否则，丢弃该第一消息。又例如，若接收设备根据第一业务的优先级信息，确定第一业务的优先级值大于或等于接收设备的业务的优先级值，则处理该第一消息，否则，丢弃该第一消息。
基于图6所示出的方法，通过第一资源指示B个侧行资源的一种冲突状态，以便相应地的设备，如第一终端设备在接收到第一消息后，可根据第一消息承载的第一资源识别B个侧行资源中资源是否冲突，及时避免因资源冲突所导致的信号干扰和数据丢失，从而提高侧链通信的可靠性。
以上结合图6-图12详细说明了本申请实施例提供的通信方法。以下结合图13-图15详细说明用于执行本申请实施例提供的通信方法的通信装置。
示例性地，图13是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图一。如图13所示，通信装置1300包括：收发模块1301和处理模块1302。为了便于说明，图13仅示出了该通信装置的主要部件。
其中，通信装置1300可适用于图5中所示出的通信系统中，执行图6中所示出的通信方法中第一终端设备的功能。
其中，收发模块1301，用于执行S601和S602。
处理模块1302，用于执行S603。
可选地，收发模块1301可以包括接收模块和发送模块(图13中未示出)。其中，接收模块用于实现通信装置1300的接收功能。发送模块用于实现通信装置1300的发送功能。
可选地，通信装置1300还可以包括存储模块(图13中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1301执行该程序或指令时，使得通信装置1300可以执行图6所示出的通信方法中接收第一消息的功能。
应理解，通信装置1300中涉及的处理模块1302可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，可以为处理器或处理单元；收发模块1301可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现，可以为收发器或收发单元。
需要说明的是，通信装置1300可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其它部件或组件，还可以是包含终端设备或网络设备的装置，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，通信装置1300的技术效果可以参考第图6所示出的通信方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
示例性地，图14是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图二。如图14所示，通信装置1400包括：接收模块1401和发送模块1402。为了便于说明，图14仅示出了该通信装置的主要部件。
其中，通信装置1400可适用于图5中所示出的通信系统中，执行图6中所示出的通信方法中第二终端设备的功能。
[根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
其中，接收模块1401，用于执行S601。
发送模块1402，用于执行S602。
可选地，接收模块1401和发送模块1402也可以集成为一个模块，如收发模块(图14中未示出)。其中，收发模块用于实现通信装置1400的发送功能和接收功能。
可选地，通信装置1400还可以包括处理模块1403(图14中以虚线框示出)。其中，处理模块1403用于实现通信装置1400的处理功能。
可选地，通信装置1400还可以包括存储模块(图14中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当接收模块1401执行该程序或指令时，使得通信装置1400可以执行图6所示出的通信方法中接收第一侧行控制信息并发送第一消息的功能。
应理解，通信装置1400中涉及的处理模块1403可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，可以为处理器或处理单元；收发模块可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现，可以为收发器或收发单元。
需要说明的是，通信装置1400可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其它部件或组件，还可以是包含终端设备或网络设备的装置，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，通信装置1400的技术效果可以参考第图6所示出的通信方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
示例性地，图15为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图三。该通信装置可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是可设置于终端设备或网络设备的芯片(系统)或其它部件或组件。如图15所示，通信装置1500可以包括处理器1501。可选地，通信装置1500还可以包括存储器1502和/或收发器1503。其中，处理器1501与存储器1502和收发器1503耦合，如可以通过通信总线连接。
下面结合图15对通信装置1500的各个构成部件进行具体的介绍：
其中，处理器1501是通信装置1500的控制中心，可以是一个处理器，也可以是多个处理元件的统称。例如，处理器1501是一个或多个中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)，也可以是特定集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASCI)，或者是被配置成实施本申请实施例的一个或多个集成电路，例如：一个或多个微处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，或，一个或者多个现场可编 程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)。
可选地，处理器1501可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器1502内的软件程序，以及调用存储在存储器1502内的数据，执行通信装置1500的各种功能。
在具体的实现中，作为一种实施例，处理器1501可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图15中所示出的CPU0和CPU1。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，通信装置1500也可以包括多个处理器，例如图15中所示的处理器1501和处理器1504。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核处理器(single-CPU)，也可以是一个多核处理器(multi-CPU)。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。
其中，所述存储器1502用于存储执行本申请方案的软件程序，并由处理器1501来控制执行，具体实现方式可以参考上述方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
可选地，存储器1502可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其它类型的静态存储设备，随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其它类型的动态存储设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或其它光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其它磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其它介质，但不限于此。存储器1502可以和处理器1501集成在一起，也可以独立存在，并通过通信装置1500的接口电路(图15中未示出)与处理器1501耦合，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
收发器1503，用于与其它通信装置之间的通信。例如，通信装置1500为终端设备，收发器1503可以用于与网络设备通信，或者与另一个终端设备通信。又例如，通信装置1500为网络设备，收发器1503可以用于与终端设备通信，或者与另一个网络设备通信。
可选地，收发器1503可以包括接收器和发送器(图15中未单独示出)。其中，接收器用于实现接收功能，发送器用于实现发送功能。
可选地，收发器1503可以和处理器1501集成在一起，也可以独立存在，并通过通信装置1500的接口电路(图15中未示出)与处理器1501耦合，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
需要说明的是，图15中示出的通信装置1500的结构并不构成对该通信装置的限定，实际的通信装置可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。
此外，通信装置1500的技术效果可以参考上述方法实施例所述的通信方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片系统实现上述任一方法实施例中的方法。
可选地，该芯片系统中的处理器可以为一个或多个。该处理器可以通过硬件实现 也可以通过软件实现。当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等。当通过软件实现时，该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现。
可选地，该芯片系统中的存储器也可以为一个或多个。该存储器可以与处理器集成在一起，也可以和处理器分离设置，本申请并不限定。示例性的，存储器可以是非瞬时性处理器，例如只读存储器ROM，其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上，也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上，本申请对存储器的类型，以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不作具体限定。
示例性的，该芯片系统可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)，可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit，ASCI)，还可以是系统芯片(system on chip，SoC)，还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit，CPU)，还可以是网络处理器(network processor，NP)，还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其它集成芯片。
本申请实施例提供一种通信系统。该通信系统包括上述一个或多个终端设备，以及一个或多个网络设备。
应理解，在本申请实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，该处理器还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASCI)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
上述实施例，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件(如电路)、固件或其它任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上 加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。
应理解，本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况，其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系，但也可能表示的是一种“和/或”的关系，具体可参考前后文进行理解。
本申请中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (41)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一侧行控制信息，所述第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数；
    发送第一消息，所述第一消息承载在第一资源上，所述第一资源用于指示B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，B为正整数，且B小于或等于A。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    冲突指示方式包括如下任一种：B个所述侧行资源中每个所述侧行资源是否冲突、B个所述侧行资源中第i个所述侧行资源不冲突、B个所述侧行资源中第i个所述侧行资源冲突、B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突；
    其中，一种所述冲突指示方式指示多种冲突状态，所述一种冲突状态属于所述多种冲突状态中的一种；
    其中，i为小于或等于A的正整数，所述B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突包括所述B个所述侧行资源有冲突和所述B个所述侧行资源不冲突，所述B个所述侧行资源有冲突为：B个所述侧行资源中有任一个侧行资源冲突，所述B个所述侧行资源不冲突为B个所述侧行资源均不冲突。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述接收第一侧行控制信息包括：第二终端设备接收所述第一侧行控制信息；
    所述第二终端设备被配置资源集合，所述资源集合包括用于指示所述冲突状态的多个资源，所述多个资源中的资源用于指示多种所述冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态，所述第一资源属于所述资源集合。
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中的任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一资源包括如下一项或多项：第一频域资源、第一时域资源、第一码域资源、或第一比特域资源，其中，所述第一比特域资源为所述第一消息占用的比特数，所述第一频域资源包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一码域资源包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、或正交覆盖码。
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    根据B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定所述第一资源。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述根据B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定所述第一资源，包括：
    根据第一侧行控制信息指示的第一业务标识，确定第一资源索引；
    根据所述第一资源索引和B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定所述第一资源；
    其中，所述第一资源索引满足如下关系：
    R ID＝(X)modR RCI；
    其中，R ID为所述第一资源索引，X为所述第一业务标识，R RCI为所述资源集合中的资源数量。
  8. 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    B个所述侧行资源包括：第一侧行资源和/或第二侧行资源，所述第二侧行资源为所述第一侧行资源的周期预留资源。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一侧行资源包括：承载所述第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或所述第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。
  10. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送第一侧行控制信息，所述第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数；
    接收第一消息，所述第一消息承载在第一资源上；
    根据所述第一资源确定B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，B为正整数，且B小于或等于A。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    根据所述一种冲突状态，更换B个所述侧行资源中冲突的所述侧行资源中的至少一个。
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    冲突指示方式包括如下任一种：B个所述侧行资源中每个所述侧行资源是否冲突、B个所述侧行资源中第i个所述侧行资源不冲突、B个所述侧行资源中第i个所述侧行资源冲突、B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突；
    其中，一种所述冲突指示方式指示多种冲突状态，所述一种冲突状态属于所述多种冲突状态中的一种；
    其中，i为小于或等于A的正整数，所述B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突包括所述B个所述侧行资源有冲突和所述B个所述侧行资源不冲突，所述B个所述侧行资源有冲突为：B个所述侧行资源中有任一个侧行资源冲突，所述B个所述侧行资源不冲突为B个所述侧行资源均不冲突。
  13. 根据权利要求10-12中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    其中，第二终端设备用于接收所述第一侧行控制信息，所述第二终端设备被配置资源集合，所述资源集合包括用于指示所述冲突状态的多个资源，所述多个资源中的资源用于指示多种所述冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态，所述第一资源属于所述资源集合。
  14. 根据权利要求10-13中的任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一资源包括如下一项或多项：第一频域资源、第一时域资源、第一码域资源、或第一比特域资源，其中，所述第一比特域资源为所述第一消息占用的比特数，所述第一频域资源包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一码域资源包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、或正交覆盖码。
  16. 根据权利要求10-15中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    B个所述侧行资源包括：第一侧行资源和/或第二侧行资源，所述第二侧行资源为所述第一侧行资源的周期预留资源。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一侧行资源包括：承载所述第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或所述第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。
  18. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：接收模块和发送模块，其中，
    所述接收模块，用于接收来自第一终端设备的第一侧行控制信息，所述第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A正整数；
    所述发送模块，用于发送第一消息，所述第一消息承载在第一资源上，所述第一资源用于指示B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，B为正整数，且B小于或等于
    A。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    冲突指示方式包括如下任一种：B个所述侧行资源中每个所述侧行资源是否冲突、B个所述侧行资源中第i个所述侧行资源不冲突、B个所述侧行资源中第i个所述侧行资源冲突、B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突；
    其中，一种所述冲突指示方式指示多种冲突状态，所述一种冲突状态属于所述多种冲突状态中的一种；
    其中，i为小于或等于A的正整数，所述B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突包括所述B个所述侧行资源有冲突和所述B个所述侧行资源不冲突，所述B个所述侧行资源有冲突为：B个所述侧行资源中有任一个侧行资源冲突，所述B个所述侧行资源不冲突为B个所述侧行资源均不冲突。
  20. 根据权利要求18或19所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述接收模块，用于第二终端设备接收所述第一侧行控制信息；
    所述第二终端设备被配置资源集合，所述资源集合包括用于指示所述冲突状态的多个资源，所述多个资源中的资源用于指示多种所述冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态，所述第一资源属于所述资源集合。
  21. 根据权利要求18-20中的任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一资源包括如下一项或多项：第一频域资源、第一码域资源、第一时域资源、或第一比特域资源，其中，所述第一比特域资源为所述第一消息占用的比特数，所述第一频域资源包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一码域资源包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、或正交覆盖码。
  23. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括：处理模块，其中，
    所述处理模块，用于根据B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定所述第一资源。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述处理模块，用于根据第一侧行控制信息指示的第一业务标识，确定第一资源索引；根据所述第一资源索引和B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，确定所述第一资源；
    其中，所述第一资源索引满足如下关系：
    R ID＝(X)modR RCI；
    其中，R ID为所述第一资源索引，X为所述第一业务标识，R RCI为所述资源集合中的资源数量。
  25. 根据权利要求18-24中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    B个所述侧行资源包括：第一侧行资源和/或第二侧行资源，所述第二侧行资源为所述第一侧行资源的周期预留资源。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一侧行资源包括：承载所述第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或所述第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。
  27. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：收发模块和处理模块，其中，
    所述收发模块，用于发送第一侧行控制信息，并接收第一消息，其中，所述第一侧行控制信息用于指示A个侧行资源的位置，A为正整数，所述第一消息承载在第一资源上；
    所述处理模块，用于根据所述第一资源确定B个所述侧行资源的一种冲突状态，B为正整数，且B小于或等于A。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括：处理模块，其中，
    所述处理模块，用于根据所述一种冲突状态，更换B个所述侧行资源中冲突的所述侧行资源中的至少一个。
  29. 根据权利要求27或28所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    冲突指示方式包括如下任一种：B个所述侧行资源中每个所述侧行资源是否冲突、B个所述侧行资源中第i个所述侧行资源不冲突、B个所述侧行资源中第i个所述侧行资源冲突、B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突；
    其中，一种所述冲突指示方式指示多种冲突状态，所述一种冲突状态属于所述多种冲突状态中的一种；
    其中，i为小于或等于A的正整数，所述B个所述侧行资源是否有冲突包括所述B个所述侧行资源有冲突和所述B个所述侧行资源不冲突，所述B个所述侧行资源有冲突为：B个所述侧行资源中有任一个侧行资源冲突，所述B个所述侧行资源不冲突为B个所述侧行资源均不冲突。
  30. 根据权利要求27-29中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    其中，第二终端设备用于接收所述第一侧行控制信息，所述第二终端设备被配置资源集合，所述资源集合包括用于指示所述冲突状态的多个资源，所述多个资源中的资源用于指示多种所述冲突状态中对应的一种冲突状态，所述第一资源属于所述资源集合。
  31. 根据权利要求27-30中的任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一资源包括如下一项或多项：第一频域资源、第一时域资源、第一码域资源、或第一比特域资源，其中，所述第一比特域资源为所述第一消息占用的比特数，所述第一频域资源包括：频域位置和/或资源块的数量。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一码域资源包括如下一种或多种：循环移位码、根序列、或正交覆盖码。
  33. 根据权利要求27-32中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    B个所述侧行资源包括：第一侧行资源和/或第二侧行资源，所述第二侧行资源为所述第一侧行资源的周期预留资源。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一侧行资源包括：承载所述第一侧行控制信息的资源和/或所述第一侧行控制信息指示的重传预留资源。
  35. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合；
    所述处理器，用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求10-17中任一项所述的方法。
  36. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器和存储器；所述存储器用于存储计算机指令，当所述处理器执行所述指令时，以使所述装置执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求10-17中任一项所述的方法。
  37. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器和接口电路；其中，
    所述接口电路，用于接收代码指令并传输至所述处理器；
    所述处理器用于运行所述代码指令以执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求10-17中任一项所述的方法。
  38. [根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
    一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和收发器，所述收发器用于所述装置和其他装置之间进行信息交互，所述处理器执行程序指令，用以执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求10-17中任一项所述的方法。
  39. [根据细则91更正 13.09.2021]　
    一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：如权利要求18-26中任一项所述的通信装置，和/或，如权利要求27-34中任一项所述的通信装置。
  40. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质包括：计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求10-17中任一项所述的方法。
  41. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求10-17中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/072323 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法及装置 WO2022151438A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/072323 WO2022151438A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法及装置
PCT/CN2021/122145 WO2022151767A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-09-30 通信方法及装置
CN202180089307.1A CN116746096A (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-09-30 通信方法及装置

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/072323 WO2022151438A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法及装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022151438A1 true WO2022151438A1 (zh) 2022-07-21

Family

ID=82447303

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/072323 WO2022151438A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法及装置
PCT/CN2021/122145 WO2022151767A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-09-30 通信方法及装置

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/122145 WO2022151767A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-09-30 通信方法及装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116746096A (zh)
WO (2) WO2022151438A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117361042B (zh) * 2023-10-30 2024-04-02 中国人民解放军陆军工程大学 一种城市地下物资运输系统及其工作方法

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106792885A (zh) * 2016-06-15 2017-05-31 北京展讯高科通信技术有限公司 D2d通信资源重选方法、装置及终端
US20200068609A1 (en) * 2017-05-04 2020-02-27 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Resource configuration and scheduling method, base station, and user equipment
CN110972290A (zh) * 2018-09-29 2020-04-07 中国信息通信研究院 一种终端直通通信的资源分配方法
CN111934835A (zh) * 2020-08-06 2020-11-13 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种资源选择、指示方法、装置、终端和存储介质

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106792885A (zh) * 2016-06-15 2017-05-31 北京展讯高科通信技术有限公司 D2d通信资源重选方法、装置及终端
US20200068609A1 (en) * 2017-05-04 2020-02-27 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Resource configuration and scheduling method, base station, and user equipment
CN110972290A (zh) * 2018-09-29 2020-04-07 中国信息通信研究院 一种终端直通通信的资源分配方法
CN111934835A (zh) * 2020-08-06 2020-11-13 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种资源选择、指示方法、装置、终端和存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ROBERT BOSCH GMBH: "Discussion on Sidelink Mode-2 Resource Allocation Enhancements", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2009127, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. E-Meeting; 20201026 - 20201113, 24 October 2020 (2020-10-24), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051946844 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116746096A (zh) 2023-09-12
WO2022151767A1 (zh) 2022-07-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3985900A1 (en) Method and apparatus for sidelink communication
EP4013161B1 (en) Data transmission method and device
EP4093132A1 (en) Method and apparatus for allocating resources through cooperation between terminals in v2x system
CN114745790A (zh) 用于免授权上行传输的系统与方法
WO2016206083A1 (zh) 上行数据传输的方法和装置
WO2016206650A1 (zh) 上行数据传输的方法和装置
EP3107345B1 (en) Channel resource indication method and device
KR20110058709A (ko) 다중 사용자 기반 무선통신 시스템에서 전송 실패 프레임의 복구 방법
US20200329489A1 (en) Service data transmission method, user equipment, and network device
US20220053495A1 (en) Multicast Feedback Configuration Method and Apparatus
CN110690944B (zh) 信道状态信息的优先级发送、确定方法及装置、存储介质、用户设备
US20220052815A1 (en) Transmission Mode Determining Method and Apparatus
WO2022151438A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
US20220247543A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink signal in a communication system
CN111418177A (zh) 可靠性传输方法及相关产品
CN112187401B (zh) 多时间单元传输方法及相关装置
EP4188014A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
EP4247084A1 (en) Resource allocation method and apparatus
WO2020249043A1 (zh) 反馈资源的配置方法及终端装置
CN111917523B (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2021031961A1 (zh) 反馈信息的传输方法及通信装置
CN112788561B (zh) 资源映射方法及终端
CN110933761B (zh) 资源调度方法及设备
JP2023534996A (ja) サイドリンク協調リソースを指示する方法、記憶媒体、並びに端末
CN114390698A (zh) 一种数据传输的方法、装置、介质以及程序产品

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21918642

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21918642

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1